blob: 9a4977d09b9a78a4ea78199888201daad6781b20 [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001//===--- SemaExpr.cpp - Semantic Analysis for Expressions -----------------===//
2//
3// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattner959e5be2007-12-29 19:59:25 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00007//
8//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
9//
10// This file implements semantic analysis for expressions.
11//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
14#include "Sema.h"
15#include "clang/AST/ASTContext.h"
Daniel Dunbar64789f82008-08-11 05:35:13 +000016#include "clang/AST/DeclObjC.h"
Chris Lattner3e254fb2008-04-08 04:40:51 +000017#include "clang/AST/ExprCXX.h"
Steve Naroff9ed3e772008-05-29 21:12:08 +000018#include "clang/AST/ExprObjC.h"
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +000019#include "clang/Lex/Preprocessor.h"
20#include "clang/Lex/LiteralSupport.h"
Daniel Dunbarcc7b1602008-08-11 03:45:03 +000021#include "clang/Basic/Diagnostic.h"
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +000022#include "clang/Basic/SourceManager.h"
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +000023#include "clang/Basic/TargetInfo.h"
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +000024#include "clang/Parse/DeclSpec.h"
Chris Lattner71ca8c82008-10-26 23:43:26 +000025#include "clang/Parse/Designator.h"
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +000026#include "clang/Parse/Scope.h"
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +000027using namespace clang;
28
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +000029//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
30// Standard Promotions and Conversions
31//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
32
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +000033/// DefaultFunctionArrayConversion (C99 6.3.2.1p3, C99 6.3.2.1p4).
34void Sema::DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(Expr *&E) {
35 QualType Ty = E->getType();
36 assert(!Ty.isNull() && "DefaultFunctionArrayConversion - missing type");
37
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +000038 if (Ty->isFunctionType())
39 ImpCastExprToType(E, Context.getPointerType(Ty));
Chris Lattner2aa68822008-07-25 21:33:13 +000040 else if (Ty->isArrayType()) {
41 // In C90 mode, arrays only promote to pointers if the array expression is
42 // an lvalue. The relevant legalese is C90 6.2.2.1p3: "an lvalue that has
43 // type 'array of type' is converted to an expression that has type 'pointer
44 // to type'...". In C99 this was changed to: C99 6.3.2.1p3: "an expression
45 // that has type 'array of type' ...". The relevant change is "an lvalue"
46 // (C90) to "an expression" (C99).
Argiris Kirtzidisf580b4d2008-09-11 04:25:59 +000047 //
48 // C++ 4.2p1:
49 // An lvalue or rvalue of type "array of N T" or "array of unknown bound of
50 // T" can be converted to an rvalue of type "pointer to T".
51 //
52 if (getLangOptions().C99 || getLangOptions().CPlusPlus ||
53 E->isLvalue(Context) == Expr::LV_Valid)
Chris Lattner2aa68822008-07-25 21:33:13 +000054 ImpCastExprToType(E, Context.getArrayDecayedType(Ty));
55 }
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +000056}
57
58/// UsualUnaryConversions - Performs various conversions that are common to most
59/// operators (C99 6.3). The conversions of array and function types are
60/// sometimes surpressed. For example, the array->pointer conversion doesn't
61/// apply if the array is an argument to the sizeof or address (&) operators.
62/// In these instances, this routine should *not* be called.
63Expr *Sema::UsualUnaryConversions(Expr *&Expr) {
64 QualType Ty = Expr->getType();
65 assert(!Ty.isNull() && "UsualUnaryConversions - missing type");
66
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +000067 if (Ty->isPromotableIntegerType()) // C99 6.3.1.1p2
68 ImpCastExprToType(Expr, Context.IntTy);
69 else
70 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(Expr);
71
72 return Expr;
73}
74
Chris Lattner9305c3d2008-07-25 22:25:12 +000075/// DefaultArgumentPromotion (C99 6.5.2.2p6). Used for function calls that
76/// do not have a prototype. Arguments that have type float are promoted to
77/// double. All other argument types are converted by UsualUnaryConversions().
78void Sema::DefaultArgumentPromotion(Expr *&Expr) {
79 QualType Ty = Expr->getType();
80 assert(!Ty.isNull() && "DefaultArgumentPromotion - missing type");
81
82 // If this is a 'float' (CVR qualified or typedef) promote to double.
83 if (const BuiltinType *BT = Ty->getAsBuiltinType())
84 if (BT->getKind() == BuiltinType::Float)
85 return ImpCastExprToType(Expr, Context.DoubleTy);
86
87 UsualUnaryConversions(Expr);
88}
89
Anders Carlsson4b8e38c2009-01-16 16:48:51 +000090// DefaultVariadicArgumentPromotion - Like DefaultArgumentPromotion, but
91// will warn if the resulting type is not a POD type.
92void Sema::DefaultVariadicArgumentPromotion(Expr *&Expr, VariadicCallType CT)
93
94{
95 DefaultArgumentPromotion(Expr);
96
97 if (!Expr->getType()->isPODType()) {
98 Diag(Expr->getLocStart(),
99 diag::warn_cannot_pass_non_pod_arg_to_vararg) <<
100 Expr->getType() << CT;
101 }
102}
103
104
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000105/// UsualArithmeticConversions - Performs various conversions that are common to
106/// binary operators (C99 6.3.1.8). If both operands aren't arithmetic, this
107/// routine returns the first non-arithmetic type found. The client is
108/// responsible for emitting appropriate error diagnostics.
109/// FIXME: verify the conversion rules for "complex int" are consistent with
110/// GCC.
111QualType Sema::UsualArithmeticConversions(Expr *&lhsExpr, Expr *&rhsExpr,
112 bool isCompAssign) {
113 if (!isCompAssign) {
114 UsualUnaryConversions(lhsExpr);
115 UsualUnaryConversions(rhsExpr);
116 }
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +0000117
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000118 // For conversion purposes, we ignore any qualifiers.
119 // For example, "const float" and "float" are equivalent.
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +0000120 QualType lhs =
121 Context.getCanonicalType(lhsExpr->getType()).getUnqualifiedType();
122 QualType rhs =
123 Context.getCanonicalType(rhsExpr->getType()).getUnqualifiedType();
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +0000124
125 // If both types are identical, no conversion is needed.
126 if (lhs == rhs)
127 return lhs;
128
129 // If either side is a non-arithmetic type (e.g. a pointer), we are done.
130 // The caller can deal with this (e.g. pointer + int).
131 if (!lhs->isArithmeticType() || !rhs->isArithmeticType())
132 return lhs;
133
134 QualType destType = UsualArithmeticConversionsType(lhs, rhs);
135 if (!isCompAssign) {
136 ImpCastExprToType(lhsExpr, destType);
137 ImpCastExprToType(rhsExpr, destType);
138 }
139 return destType;
140}
141
142QualType Sema::UsualArithmeticConversionsType(QualType lhs, QualType rhs) {
143 // Perform the usual unary conversions. We do this early so that
144 // integral promotions to "int" can allow us to exit early, in the
145 // lhs == rhs check. Also, for conversion purposes, we ignore any
146 // qualifiers. For example, "const float" and "float" are
147 // equivalent.
Douglas Gregor3d4492e2008-11-13 20:12:29 +0000148 if (lhs->isPromotableIntegerType()) lhs = Context.IntTy;
149 else lhs = lhs.getUnqualifiedType();
150 if (rhs->isPromotableIntegerType()) rhs = Context.IntTy;
151 else rhs = rhs.getUnqualifiedType();
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +0000152
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000153 // If both types are identical, no conversion is needed.
154 if (lhs == rhs)
155 return lhs;
156
157 // If either side is a non-arithmetic type (e.g. a pointer), we are done.
158 // The caller can deal with this (e.g. pointer + int).
159 if (!lhs->isArithmeticType() || !rhs->isArithmeticType())
160 return lhs;
161
162 // At this point, we have two different arithmetic types.
163
164 // Handle complex types first (C99 6.3.1.8p1).
165 if (lhs->isComplexType() || rhs->isComplexType()) {
166 // if we have an integer operand, the result is the complex type.
167 if (rhs->isIntegerType() || rhs->isComplexIntegerType()) {
168 // convert the rhs to the lhs complex type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000169 return lhs;
170 }
171 if (lhs->isIntegerType() || lhs->isComplexIntegerType()) {
172 // convert the lhs to the rhs complex type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000173 return rhs;
174 }
175 // This handles complex/complex, complex/float, or float/complex.
176 // When both operands are complex, the shorter operand is converted to the
177 // type of the longer, and that is the type of the result. This corresponds
178 // to what is done when combining two real floating-point operands.
179 // The fun begins when size promotion occur across type domains.
180 // From H&S 6.3.4: When one operand is complex and the other is a real
181 // floating-point type, the less precise type is converted, within it's
182 // real or complex domain, to the precision of the other type. For example,
183 // when combining a "long double" with a "double _Complex", the
184 // "double _Complex" is promoted to "long double _Complex".
185 int result = Context.getFloatingTypeOrder(lhs, rhs);
186
187 if (result > 0) { // The left side is bigger, convert rhs.
188 rhs = Context.getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(lhs, rhs);
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000189 } else if (result < 0) { // The right side is bigger, convert lhs.
190 lhs = Context.getFloatingTypeOfSizeWithinDomain(rhs, lhs);
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000191 }
192 // At this point, lhs and rhs have the same rank/size. Now, make sure the
193 // domains match. This is a requirement for our implementation, C99
194 // does not require this promotion.
195 if (lhs != rhs) { // Domains don't match, we have complex/float mix.
196 if (lhs->isRealFloatingType()) { // handle "double, _Complex double".
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000197 return rhs;
198 } else { // handle "_Complex double, double".
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000199 return lhs;
200 }
201 }
202 return lhs; // The domain/size match exactly.
203 }
204 // Now handle "real" floating types (i.e. float, double, long double).
205 if (lhs->isRealFloatingType() || rhs->isRealFloatingType()) {
206 // if we have an integer operand, the result is the real floating type.
Anders Carlsson488a0792008-12-10 23:30:05 +0000207 if (rhs->isIntegerType()) {
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000208 // convert rhs to the lhs floating point type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000209 return lhs;
210 }
Anders Carlsson488a0792008-12-10 23:30:05 +0000211 if (rhs->isComplexIntegerType()) {
212 // convert rhs to the complex floating point type.
213 return Context.getComplexType(lhs);
214 }
215 if (lhs->isIntegerType()) {
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000216 // convert lhs to the rhs floating point type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000217 return rhs;
218 }
Anders Carlsson488a0792008-12-10 23:30:05 +0000219 if (lhs->isComplexIntegerType()) {
220 // convert lhs to the complex floating point type.
221 return Context.getComplexType(rhs);
222 }
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000223 // We have two real floating types, float/complex combos were handled above.
224 // Convert the smaller operand to the bigger result.
225 int result = Context.getFloatingTypeOrder(lhs, rhs);
226
227 if (result > 0) { // convert the rhs
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000228 return lhs;
229 }
230 if (result < 0) { // convert the lhs
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000231 return rhs;
232 }
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +0000233 assert(0 && "Sema::UsualArithmeticConversionsType(): illegal float comparison");
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000234 }
235 if (lhs->isComplexIntegerType() || rhs->isComplexIntegerType()) {
236 // Handle GCC complex int extension.
237 const ComplexType *lhsComplexInt = lhs->getAsComplexIntegerType();
238 const ComplexType *rhsComplexInt = rhs->getAsComplexIntegerType();
239
240 if (lhsComplexInt && rhsComplexInt) {
241 if (Context.getIntegerTypeOrder(lhsComplexInt->getElementType(),
242 rhsComplexInt->getElementType()) >= 0) {
243 // convert the rhs
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000244 return lhs;
245 }
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000246 return rhs;
247 } else if (lhsComplexInt && rhs->isIntegerType()) {
248 // convert the rhs to the lhs complex type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000249 return lhs;
250 } else if (rhsComplexInt && lhs->isIntegerType()) {
251 // convert the lhs to the rhs complex type.
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000252 return rhs;
253 }
254 }
255 // Finally, we have two differing integer types.
256 // The rules for this case are in C99 6.3.1.8
257 int compare = Context.getIntegerTypeOrder(lhs, rhs);
258 bool lhsSigned = lhs->isSignedIntegerType(),
259 rhsSigned = rhs->isSignedIntegerType();
260 QualType destType;
261 if (lhsSigned == rhsSigned) {
262 // Same signedness; use the higher-ranked type
263 destType = compare >= 0 ? lhs : rhs;
264 } else if (compare != (lhsSigned ? 1 : -1)) {
265 // The unsigned type has greater than or equal rank to the
266 // signed type, so use the unsigned type
267 destType = lhsSigned ? rhs : lhs;
268 } else if (Context.getIntWidth(lhs) != Context.getIntWidth(rhs)) {
269 // The two types are different widths; if we are here, that
270 // means the signed type is larger than the unsigned type, so
271 // use the signed type.
272 destType = lhsSigned ? lhs : rhs;
273 } else {
274 // The signed type is higher-ranked than the unsigned type,
275 // but isn't actually any bigger (like unsigned int and long
276 // on most 32-bit systems). Use the unsigned type corresponding
277 // to the signed type.
278 destType = Context.getCorrespondingUnsignedType(lhsSigned ? lhs : rhs);
279 }
Chris Lattner299b8842008-07-25 21:10:04 +0000280 return destType;
281}
282
283//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
284// Semantic Analysis for various Expression Types
285//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
286
287
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +0000288/// ActOnStringLiteral - The specified tokens were lexed as pasted string
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000289/// fragments (e.g. "foo" "bar" L"baz"). The result string has to handle string
290/// concatenation ([C99 5.1.1.2, translation phase #6]), so it may come from
291/// multiple tokens. However, the common case is that StringToks points to one
292/// string.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000293///
294Action::OwningExprResult
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +0000295Sema::ActOnStringLiteral(const Token *StringToks, unsigned NumStringToks) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000296 assert(NumStringToks && "Must have at least one string!");
297
Chris Lattner9eaf2b72009-01-16 18:51:42 +0000298 StringLiteralParser Literal(StringToks, NumStringToks, PP);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000299 if (Literal.hadError)
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000300 return ExprError();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000301
302 llvm::SmallVector<SourceLocation, 4> StringTokLocs;
303 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumStringToks; ++i)
304 StringTokLocs.push_back(StringToks[i].getLocation());
Chris Lattnera6dcce32008-02-11 00:02:17 +0000305
Chris Lattnera6dcce32008-02-11 00:02:17 +0000306 QualType StrTy = Context.CharTy;
Argiris Kirtzidis2a4e1162008-08-09 17:20:01 +0000307 if (Literal.AnyWide) StrTy = Context.getWCharType();
Chris Lattnera6dcce32008-02-11 00:02:17 +0000308 if (Literal.Pascal) StrTy = Context.UnsignedCharTy;
Douglas Gregor1815b3b2008-09-12 00:47:35 +0000309
310 // A C++ string literal has a const-qualified element type (C++ 2.13.4p1).
311 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus)
312 StrTy.addConst();
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000313
Chris Lattnera6dcce32008-02-11 00:02:17 +0000314 // Get an array type for the string, according to C99 6.4.5. This includes
315 // the nul terminator character as well as the string length for pascal
316 // strings.
317 StrTy = Context.getConstantArrayType(StrTy,
318 llvm::APInt(32, Literal.GetStringLength()+1),
319 ArrayType::Normal, 0);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000320
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000321 // Pass &StringTokLocs[0], StringTokLocs.size() to factory!
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000322 return Owned(new (Context) StringLiteral(Literal.GetString(),
323 Literal.GetStringLength(),
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000324 Literal.AnyWide, StrTy,
325 StringToks[0].getLocation(),
326 StringToks[NumStringToks-1].getLocation()));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000327}
328
Chris Lattnerb2ebd482008-10-20 05:16:36 +0000329/// ShouldSnapshotBlockValueReference - Return true if a reference inside of
330/// CurBlock to VD should cause it to be snapshotted (as we do for auto
331/// variables defined outside the block) or false if this is not needed (e.g.
332/// for values inside the block or for globals).
333///
334/// FIXME: This will create BlockDeclRefExprs for global variables,
335/// function references, etc which is suboptimal :) and breaks
336/// things like "integer constant expression" tests.
337static bool ShouldSnapshotBlockValueReference(BlockSemaInfo *CurBlock,
338 ValueDecl *VD) {
339 // If the value is defined inside the block, we couldn't snapshot it even if
340 // we wanted to.
341 if (CurBlock->TheDecl == VD->getDeclContext())
342 return false;
343
344 // If this is an enum constant or function, it is constant, don't snapshot.
345 if (isa<EnumConstantDecl>(VD) || isa<FunctionDecl>(VD))
346 return false;
347
348 // If this is a reference to an extern, static, or global variable, no need to
349 // snapshot it.
350 // FIXME: What about 'const' variables in C++?
351 if (const VarDecl *Var = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(VD))
352 return Var->hasLocalStorage();
353
354 return true;
355}
356
357
358
Steve Naroff0acc9c92007-09-15 18:49:24 +0000359/// ActOnIdentifierExpr - The parser read an identifier in expression context,
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000360/// validate it per-C99 6.5.1. HasTrailingLParen indicates whether this
Steve Naroffe50e14c2008-03-19 23:46:26 +0000361/// identifier is used in a function call context.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000362/// SS is only used for a C++ qualified-id (foo::bar) to indicate the
Argiris Kirtzidis054a2632008-11-08 17:17:31 +0000363/// class or namespace that the identifier must be a member of.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000364Sema::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnIdentifierExpr(Scope *S, SourceLocation Loc,
365 IdentifierInfo &II,
366 bool HasTrailingLParen,
367 const CXXScopeSpec *SS) {
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000368 return ActOnDeclarationNameExpr(S, Loc, &II, HasTrailingLParen, SS);
369}
370
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +0000371/// BuildDeclRefExpr - Build either a DeclRefExpr or a
372/// QualifiedDeclRefExpr based on whether or not SS is a
373/// nested-name-specifier.
374DeclRefExpr *Sema::BuildDeclRefExpr(NamedDecl *D, QualType Ty, SourceLocation Loc,
375 bool TypeDependent, bool ValueDependent,
376 const CXXScopeSpec *SS) {
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000377 if (SS && !SS->isEmpty())
378 return new (Context) QualifiedDeclRefExpr(D, Ty, Loc, TypeDependent,
Steve Naroffe5f128a2009-01-20 19:53:53 +0000379 ValueDependent, SS->getRange().getBegin());
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000380 else
381 return new (Context) DeclRefExpr(D, Ty, Loc, TypeDependent, ValueDependent);
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +0000382}
383
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000384/// getObjectForAnonymousRecordDecl - Retrieve the (unnamed) field or
385/// variable corresponding to the anonymous union or struct whose type
386/// is Record.
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000387static Decl *getObjectForAnonymousRecordDecl(RecordDecl *Record) {
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000388 assert(Record->isAnonymousStructOrUnion() &&
389 "Record must be an anonymous struct or union!");
390
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000391 // FIXME: Once Decls are directly linked together, this will
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000392 // be an O(1) operation rather than a slow walk through DeclContext's
393 // vector (which itself will be eliminated). DeclGroups might make
394 // this even better.
395 DeclContext *Ctx = Record->getDeclContext();
396 for (DeclContext::decl_iterator D = Ctx->decls_begin(),
397 DEnd = Ctx->decls_end();
398 D != DEnd; ++D) {
399 if (*D == Record) {
400 // The object for the anonymous struct/union directly
401 // follows its type in the list of declarations.
402 ++D;
403 assert(D != DEnd && "Missing object for anonymous record");
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000404 assert(!cast<NamedDecl>(*D)->getDeclName() && "Decl should be unnamed");
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000405 return *D;
406 }
407 }
408
409 assert(false && "Missing object for anonymous record");
410 return 0;
411}
412
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000413Sema::OwningExprResult
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000414Sema::BuildAnonymousStructUnionMemberReference(SourceLocation Loc,
415 FieldDecl *Field,
416 Expr *BaseObjectExpr,
417 SourceLocation OpLoc) {
418 assert(Field->getDeclContext()->isRecord() &&
419 cast<RecordDecl>(Field->getDeclContext())->isAnonymousStructOrUnion()
420 && "Field must be stored inside an anonymous struct or union");
421
422 // Construct the sequence of field member references
423 // we'll have to perform to get to the field in the anonymous
424 // union/struct. The list of members is built from the field
425 // outward, so traverse it backwards to go from an object in
426 // the current context to the field we found.
427 llvm::SmallVector<FieldDecl *, 4> AnonFields;
428 AnonFields.push_back(Field);
429 VarDecl *BaseObject = 0;
430 DeclContext *Ctx = Field->getDeclContext();
431 do {
432 RecordDecl *Record = cast<RecordDecl>(Ctx);
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000433 Decl *AnonObject = getObjectForAnonymousRecordDecl(Record);
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000434 if (FieldDecl *AnonField = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(AnonObject))
435 AnonFields.push_back(AnonField);
436 else {
437 BaseObject = cast<VarDecl>(AnonObject);
438 break;
439 }
440 Ctx = Ctx->getParent();
441 } while (Ctx->isRecord() &&
442 cast<RecordDecl>(Ctx)->isAnonymousStructOrUnion());
443
444 // Build the expression that refers to the base object, from
445 // which we will build a sequence of member references to each
446 // of the anonymous union objects and, eventually, the field we
447 // found via name lookup.
448 bool BaseObjectIsPointer = false;
449 unsigned ExtraQuals = 0;
450 if (BaseObject) {
451 // BaseObject is an anonymous struct/union variable (and is,
452 // therefore, not part of another non-anonymous record).
453 delete BaseObjectExpr;
454
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000455 BaseObjectExpr = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(BaseObject,BaseObject->getType(),
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000456 SourceLocation());
457 ExtraQuals
458 = Context.getCanonicalType(BaseObject->getType()).getCVRQualifiers();
459 } else if (BaseObjectExpr) {
460 // The caller provided the base object expression. Determine
461 // whether its a pointer and whether it adds any qualifiers to the
462 // anonymous struct/union fields we're looking into.
463 QualType ObjectType = BaseObjectExpr->getType();
464 if (const PointerType *ObjectPtr = ObjectType->getAsPointerType()) {
465 BaseObjectIsPointer = true;
466 ObjectType = ObjectPtr->getPointeeType();
467 }
468 ExtraQuals = Context.getCanonicalType(ObjectType).getCVRQualifiers();
469 } else {
470 // We've found a member of an anonymous struct/union that is
471 // inside a non-anonymous struct/union, so in a well-formed
472 // program our base object expression is "this".
473 if (CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(CurContext)) {
474 if (!MD->isStatic()) {
475 QualType AnonFieldType
476 = Context.getTagDeclType(
477 cast<RecordDecl>(AnonFields.back()->getDeclContext()));
478 QualType ThisType = Context.getTagDeclType(MD->getParent());
479 if ((Context.getCanonicalType(AnonFieldType)
480 == Context.getCanonicalType(ThisType)) ||
481 IsDerivedFrom(ThisType, AnonFieldType)) {
482 // Our base object expression is "this".
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000483 BaseObjectExpr = new (Context) CXXThisExpr(SourceLocation(),
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000484 MD->getThisType(Context));
485 BaseObjectIsPointer = true;
486 }
487 } else {
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000488 return ExprError(Diag(Loc,diag::err_invalid_member_use_in_static_method)
489 << Field->getDeclName());
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000490 }
491 ExtraQuals = MD->getTypeQualifiers();
492 }
493
494 if (!BaseObjectExpr)
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000495 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_invalid_non_static_member_use)
496 << Field->getDeclName());
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000497 }
498
499 // Build the implicit member references to the field of the
500 // anonymous struct/union.
501 Expr *Result = BaseObjectExpr;
502 for (llvm::SmallVector<FieldDecl *, 4>::reverse_iterator
503 FI = AnonFields.rbegin(), FIEnd = AnonFields.rend();
504 FI != FIEnd; ++FI) {
505 QualType MemberType = (*FI)->getType();
506 if (!(*FI)->isMutable()) {
507 unsigned combinedQualifiers
508 = MemberType.getCVRQualifiers() | ExtraQuals;
509 MemberType = MemberType.getQualifiedType(combinedQualifiers);
510 }
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000511 Result = new (Context) MemberExpr(Result, BaseObjectIsPointer, *FI,
512 OpLoc, MemberType);
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000513 BaseObjectIsPointer = false;
514 ExtraQuals = Context.getCanonicalType(MemberType).getCVRQualifiers();
515 OpLoc = SourceLocation();
516 }
517
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000518 return Owned(Result);
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000519}
520
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000521/// ActOnDeclarationNameExpr - The parser has read some kind of name
522/// (e.g., a C++ id-expression (C++ [expr.prim]p1)). This routine
523/// performs lookup on that name and returns an expression that refers
524/// to that name. This routine isn't directly called from the parser,
525/// because the parser doesn't know about DeclarationName. Rather,
526/// this routine is called by ActOnIdentifierExpr,
527/// ActOnOperatorFunctionIdExpr, and ActOnConversionFunctionExpr,
528/// which form the DeclarationName from the corresponding syntactic
529/// forms.
530///
531/// HasTrailingLParen indicates whether this identifier is used in a
532/// function call context. LookupCtx is only used for a C++
533/// qualified-id (foo::bar) to indicate the class or namespace that
534/// the identifier must be a member of.
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +0000535///
536/// If ForceResolution is true, then we will attempt to resolve the
537/// name even if it looks like a dependent name. This option is off by
538/// default.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000539Sema::OwningExprResult
540Sema::ActOnDeclarationNameExpr(Scope *S, SourceLocation Loc,
541 DeclarationName Name, bool HasTrailingLParen,
542 const CXXScopeSpec *SS, bool ForceResolution) {
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +0000543 if (S->getTemplateParamParent() && Name.getAsIdentifierInfo() &&
544 HasTrailingLParen && !SS && !ForceResolution) {
545 // We've seen something of the form
546 // identifier(
547 // and we are in a template, so it is likely that 's' is a
548 // dependent name. However, we won't know until we've parsed all
549 // of the call arguments. So, build a CXXDependentNameExpr node
550 // to represent this name. Then, if it turns out that none of the
551 // arguments are type-dependent, we'll force the resolution of the
552 // dependent name at that point.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000553 return Owned(new (Context) CXXDependentNameExpr(Name.getAsIdentifierInfo(),
554 Context.DependentTy, Loc));
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +0000555 }
556
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000557 // Could be enum-constant, value decl, instance variable, etc.
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +0000558 Decl *D = 0;
559 LookupResult Lookup;
Argiris Kirtzidis054a2632008-11-08 17:17:31 +0000560 if (SS && !SS->isEmpty()) {
561 DeclContext *DC = static_cast<DeclContext*>(SS->getScopeRep());
562 if (DC == 0)
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000563 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +0000564 Lookup = LookupDecl(Name, Decl::IDNS_Ordinary, S, DC);
Argiris Kirtzidis054a2632008-11-08 17:17:31 +0000565 } else
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +0000566 Lookup = LookupDecl(Name, Decl::IDNS_Ordinary, S);
567
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000568 if (Lookup.isAmbiguous()) {
569 DiagnoseAmbiguousLookup(Lookup, Name, Loc,
570 SS && SS->isSet() ? SS->getRange()
571 : SourceRange());
572 return ExprError();
573 } else
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +0000574 D = Lookup.getAsDecl();
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +0000575
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000576 // If this reference is in an Objective-C method, then ivar lookup happens as
577 // well.
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000578 IdentifierInfo *II = Name.getAsIdentifierInfo();
579 if (II && getCurMethodDecl()) {
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000580 // There are two cases to handle here. 1) scoped lookup could have failed,
581 // in which case we should look for an ivar. 2) scoped lookup could have
582 // found a decl, but that decl is outside the current method (i.e. a global
583 // variable). In these two cases, we do a lookup for an ivar with this
584 // name, if the lookup suceeds, we replace it our current decl.
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000585 if (D == 0 || D->isDefinedOutsideFunctionOrMethod()) {
Argiris Kirtzidis95256e62008-06-28 06:07:14 +0000586 ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFace = getCurMethodDecl()->getClassInterface();
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000587 if (ObjCIvarDecl *IV = IFace->lookupInstanceVariable(II)) {
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000588 // FIXME: This should use a new expr for a direct reference, don't turn
589 // this into Self->ivar, just return a BareIVarExpr or something.
590 IdentifierInfo &II = Context.Idents.get("self");
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000591 OwningExprResult SelfExpr = ActOnIdentifierExpr(S, Loc, II, false);
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000592 ObjCIvarRefExpr *MRef = new (Context) ObjCIvarRefExpr(IV, IV->getType(),
593 Loc, static_cast<Expr*>(SelfExpr.release()),
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000594 true, true);
Fariborz Jahanianea944842008-12-18 17:29:46 +0000595 Context.setFieldDecl(IFace, IV, MRef);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000596 return Owned(MRef);
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000597 }
598 }
Steve Naroff0ccfaa42008-08-10 19:10:41 +0000599 // Needed to implement property "super.method" notation.
Douglas Gregoraf8ad2b2009-01-20 01:17:11 +0000600 if (D == 0 && II->isStr("super")) {
Steve Naroff6f786252008-06-02 23:03:37 +0000601 QualType T = Context.getPointerType(Context.getObjCInterfaceType(
Argiris Kirtzidis95256e62008-06-28 06:07:14 +0000602 getCurMethodDecl()->getClassInterface()));
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000603 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCSuperExpr(Loc, T));
Steve Naroff6f786252008-06-02 23:03:37 +0000604 }
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000605 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000606 if (D == 0) {
607 // Otherwise, this could be an implicitly declared function reference (legal
608 // in C90, extension in C99).
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000609 if (HasTrailingLParen && II &&
Chris Lattnerc72d22d2008-03-31 00:36:02 +0000610 !getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) // Not in C++.
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000611 D = ImplicitlyDefineFunction(Loc, *II, S);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000612 else {
613 // If this name wasn't predeclared and if this is not a function call,
614 // diagnose the problem.
Argiris Kirtzidis054a2632008-11-08 17:17:31 +0000615 if (SS && !SS->isEmpty())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000616 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_no_member)
617 << Name << SS->getRange());
Douglas Gregoraee3bf82008-11-18 15:03:34 +0000618 else if (Name.getNameKind() == DeclarationName::CXXOperatorName ||
619 Name.getNameKind() == DeclarationName::CXXConversionFunctionName)
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000620 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_undeclared_use)
621 << Name.getAsString());
Argiris Kirtzidis054a2632008-11-08 17:17:31 +0000622 else
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000623 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_undeclared_var_use) << Name);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000624 }
625 }
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000626
627 // We may have found a field within an anonymous union or struct
628 // (C++ [class.union]).
629 if (FieldDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(D))
630 if (cast<RecordDecl>(FD->getDeclContext())->isAnonymousStructOrUnion())
631 return BuildAnonymousStructUnionMemberReference(Loc, FD);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000632
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000633 if (CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(CurContext)) {
634 if (!MD->isStatic()) {
635 // C++ [class.mfct.nonstatic]p2:
636 // [...] if name lookup (3.4.1) resolves the name in the
637 // id-expression to a nonstatic nontype member of class X or of
638 // a base class of X, the id-expression is transformed into a
639 // class member access expression (5.2.5) using (*this) (9.3.2)
640 // as the postfix-expression to the left of the '.' operator.
641 DeclContext *Ctx = 0;
642 QualType MemberType;
643 if (FieldDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(D)) {
644 Ctx = FD->getDeclContext();
645 MemberType = FD->getType();
646
647 if (const ReferenceType *RefType = MemberType->getAsReferenceType())
648 MemberType = RefType->getPointeeType();
649 else if (!FD->isMutable()) {
650 unsigned combinedQualifiers
651 = MemberType.getCVRQualifiers() | MD->getTypeQualifiers();
652 MemberType = MemberType.getQualifiedType(combinedQualifiers);
653 }
654 } else if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(D)) {
655 if (!Method->isStatic()) {
656 Ctx = Method->getParent();
657 MemberType = Method->getType();
658 }
659 } else if (OverloadedFunctionDecl *Ovl
660 = dyn_cast<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(D)) {
661 for (OverloadedFunctionDecl::function_iterator
662 Func = Ovl->function_begin(),
663 FuncEnd = Ovl->function_end();
664 Func != FuncEnd; ++Func) {
665 if (CXXMethodDecl *DMethod = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(*Func))
666 if (!DMethod->isStatic()) {
667 Ctx = Ovl->getDeclContext();
668 MemberType = Context.OverloadTy;
669 break;
670 }
671 }
672 }
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000673
674 if (Ctx && Ctx->isRecord()) {
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000675 QualType CtxType = Context.getTagDeclType(cast<CXXRecordDecl>(Ctx));
676 QualType ThisType = Context.getTagDeclType(MD->getParent());
677 if ((Context.getCanonicalType(CtxType)
678 == Context.getCanonicalType(ThisType)) ||
679 IsDerivedFrom(ThisType, CtxType)) {
680 // Build the implicit member access expression.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000681 Expr *This = new (Context) CXXThisExpr(SourceLocation(),
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000682 MD->getThisType(Context));
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000683 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(This, true, cast<NamedDecl>(D),
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000684 SourceLocation(), MemberType));
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000685 }
686 }
687 }
688 }
689
Douglas Gregor8acb7272008-12-11 16:49:14 +0000690 if (FieldDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(D)) {
Argiris Kirtzidis38f16712008-07-01 10:37:29 +0000691 if (CXXMethodDecl *MD = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(CurContext)) {
692 if (MD->isStatic())
693 // "invalid use of member 'x' in static member function"
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000694 return ExprError(Diag(Loc,diag::err_invalid_member_use_in_static_method)
695 << FD->getDeclName());
Argiris Kirtzidis38f16712008-07-01 10:37:29 +0000696 }
697
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000698 // Any other ways we could have found the field in a well-formed
699 // program would have been turned into implicit member expressions
700 // above.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000701 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_invalid_non_static_member_use)
702 << FD->getDeclName());
Argiris Kirtzidis38f16712008-07-01 10:37:29 +0000703 }
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +0000704
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000705 if (isa<TypedefDecl>(D))
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000706 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_unexpected_typedef) << Name);
Ted Kremenek42730c52008-01-07 19:49:32 +0000707 if (isa<ObjCInterfaceDecl>(D))
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000708 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_unexpected_interface) << Name);
Argiris Kirtzidis03e6aaf2008-04-27 13:50:30 +0000709 if (isa<NamespaceDecl>(D))
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000710 return ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::err_unexpected_namespace) << Name);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000711
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +0000712 // Make the DeclRefExpr or BlockDeclRefExpr for the decl.
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +0000713 if (OverloadedFunctionDecl *Ovl = dyn_cast<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(D))
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000714 return Owned(BuildDeclRefExpr(Ovl, Context.OverloadTy, Loc,
715 false, false, SS));
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +0000716
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +0000717 ValueDecl *VD = cast<ValueDecl>(D);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000718
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +0000719 // check if referencing an identifier with __attribute__((deprecated)).
720 if (VD->getAttr<DeprecatedAttr>())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000721 ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::warn_deprecated) << VD->getDeclName());
722
Douglas Gregor48840c72008-12-10 23:01:14 +0000723 if (VarDecl *Var = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(VD)) {
724 if (Var->isDeclaredInCondition() && Var->getType()->isScalarType()) {
725 Scope *CheckS = S;
726 while (CheckS) {
727 if (CheckS->isWithinElse() &&
728 CheckS->getControlParent()->isDeclScope(Var)) {
729 if (Var->getType()->isBooleanType())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000730 ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::warn_value_always_false)
731 << Var->getDeclName());
Douglas Gregor48840c72008-12-10 23:01:14 +0000732 else
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000733 ExprError(Diag(Loc, diag::warn_value_always_zero)
734 << Var->getDeclName());
Douglas Gregor48840c72008-12-10 23:01:14 +0000735 break;
736 }
737
738 // Move up one more control parent to check again.
739 CheckS = CheckS->getControlParent();
740 if (CheckS)
741 CheckS = CheckS->getParent();
742 }
743 }
744 }
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +0000745
746 // Only create DeclRefExpr's for valid Decl's.
747 if (VD->isInvalidDecl())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000748 return ExprError();
749
Chris Lattnerb2ebd482008-10-20 05:16:36 +0000750 // If the identifier reference is inside a block, and it refers to a value
751 // that is outside the block, create a BlockDeclRefExpr instead of a
752 // DeclRefExpr. This ensures the value is treated as a copy-in snapshot when
753 // the block is formed.
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +0000754 //
Chris Lattnerb2ebd482008-10-20 05:16:36 +0000755 // We do not do this for things like enum constants, global variables, etc,
756 // as they do not get snapshotted.
757 //
758 if (CurBlock && ShouldSnapshotBlockValueReference(CurBlock, VD)) {
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +0000759 // The BlocksAttr indicates the variable is bound by-reference.
760 if (VD->getAttr<BlocksAttr>())
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000761 return Owned(new (Context) BlockDeclRefExpr(VD,
Steve Naroffe5f128a2009-01-20 19:53:53 +0000762 VD->getType().getNonReferenceType(), Loc, true));
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000763
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +0000764 // Variable will be bound by-copy, make it const within the closure.
765 VD->getType().addConst();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000766 return Owned(new (Context) BlockDeclRefExpr(VD,
Steve Naroffe5f128a2009-01-20 19:53:53 +0000767 VD->getType().getNonReferenceType(), Loc, false));
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +0000768 }
769 // If this reference is not in a block or if the referenced variable is
770 // within the block, create a normal DeclRefExpr.
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +0000771
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +0000772 bool TypeDependent = false;
Douglas Gregora5d84612008-12-10 20:57:37 +0000773 bool ValueDependent = false;
774 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
775 // C++ [temp.dep.expr]p3:
776 // An id-expression is type-dependent if it contains:
777 // - an identifier that was declared with a dependent type,
778 if (VD->getType()->isDependentType())
779 TypeDependent = true;
780 // - FIXME: a template-id that is dependent,
781 // - a conversion-function-id that specifies a dependent type,
782 else if (Name.getNameKind() == DeclarationName::CXXConversionFunctionName &&
783 Name.getCXXNameType()->isDependentType())
784 TypeDependent = true;
785 // - a nested-name-specifier that contains a class-name that
786 // names a dependent type.
787 else if (SS && !SS->isEmpty()) {
788 for (DeclContext *DC = static_cast<DeclContext*>(SS->getScopeRep());
789 DC; DC = DC->getParent()) {
790 // FIXME: could stop early at namespace scope.
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +0000791 if (DC->isRecord()) {
Douglas Gregora5d84612008-12-10 20:57:37 +0000792 CXXRecordDecl *Record = cast<CXXRecordDecl>(DC);
793 if (Context.getTypeDeclType(Record)->isDependentType()) {
794 TypeDependent = true;
795 break;
796 }
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +0000797 }
798 }
799 }
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +0000800
Douglas Gregora5d84612008-12-10 20:57:37 +0000801 // C++ [temp.dep.constexpr]p2:
802 //
803 // An identifier is value-dependent if it is:
804 // - a name declared with a dependent type,
805 if (TypeDependent)
806 ValueDependent = true;
807 // - the name of a non-type template parameter,
808 else if (isa<NonTypeTemplateParmDecl>(VD))
809 ValueDependent = true;
810 // - a constant with integral or enumeration type and is
811 // initialized with an expression that is value-dependent
812 // (FIXME!).
813 }
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +0000814
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000815 return Owned(BuildDeclRefExpr(VD, VD->getType().getNonReferenceType(), Loc,
816 TypeDependent, ValueDependent, SS));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000817}
818
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000819Sema::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnPredefinedExpr(SourceLocation Loc,
820 tok::TokenKind Kind) {
Chris Lattner69909292008-08-10 01:53:14 +0000821 PredefinedExpr::IdentType IT;
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000822
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000823 switch (Kind) {
Chris Lattnere12ca5d2008-01-12 18:39:25 +0000824 default: assert(0 && "Unknown simple primary expr!");
Chris Lattner69909292008-08-10 01:53:14 +0000825 case tok::kw___func__: IT = PredefinedExpr::Func; break; // [C99 6.4.2.2]
826 case tok::kw___FUNCTION__: IT = PredefinedExpr::Function; break;
827 case tok::kw___PRETTY_FUNCTION__: IT = PredefinedExpr::PrettyFunction; break;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000828 }
Chris Lattnere12ca5d2008-01-12 18:39:25 +0000829
Chris Lattner7e637512008-01-12 08:14:25 +0000830 // Pre-defined identifiers are of type char[x], where x is the length of the
831 // string.
Chris Lattnerfc9511c2008-01-12 19:32:28 +0000832 unsigned Length;
Chris Lattnere5cb5862008-12-04 23:50:19 +0000833 if (FunctionDecl *FD = getCurFunctionDecl())
834 Length = FD->getIdentifier()->getLength();
Chris Lattnerbce5e4f2008-12-12 05:05:20 +0000835 else if (ObjCMethodDecl *MD = getCurMethodDecl())
836 Length = MD->getSynthesizedMethodSize();
837 else {
838 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_predef_outside_function);
839 // __PRETTY_FUNCTION__ -> "top level", the others produce an empty string.
840 Length = IT == PredefinedExpr::PrettyFunction ? strlen("top level") : 0;
841 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000842
843
Chris Lattnerfc9511c2008-01-12 19:32:28 +0000844 llvm::APInt LengthI(32, Length + 1);
Chris Lattnere12ca5d2008-01-12 18:39:25 +0000845 QualType ResTy = Context.CharTy.getQualifiedType(QualType::Const);
Chris Lattnerfc9511c2008-01-12 19:32:28 +0000846 ResTy = Context.getConstantArrayType(ResTy, LengthI, ArrayType::Normal, 0);
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000847 return Owned(new (Context) PredefinedExpr(Loc, ResTy, IT));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000848}
849
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000850Sema::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnCharacterConstant(const Token &Tok) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000851 llvm::SmallString<16> CharBuffer;
852 CharBuffer.resize(Tok.getLength());
853 const char *ThisTokBegin = &CharBuffer[0];
854 unsigned ActualLength = PP.getSpelling(Tok, ThisTokBegin);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000855
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000856 CharLiteralParser Literal(ThisTokBegin, ThisTokBegin+ActualLength,
857 Tok.getLocation(), PP);
858 if (Literal.hadError())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000859 return ExprError();
Chris Lattner6b22fb72008-03-01 08:32:21 +0000860
861 QualType type = getLangOptions().CPlusPlus ? Context.CharTy : Context.IntTy;
862
Sebastian Redl75324932009-01-20 22:23:13 +0000863 return Owned(new (Context) CharacterLiteral(Literal.getValue(),
864 Literal.isWide(),
865 type, Tok.getLocation()));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000866}
867
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000868Action::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnNumericConstant(const Token &Tok) {
869 // Fast path for a single digit (which is quite common). A single digit
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000870 // cannot have a trigraph, escaped newline, radix prefix, or type suffix.
871 if (Tok.getLength() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerfd5f1432009-01-16 07:10:29 +0000872 const char Val = PP.getSpelledCharacterAt(Tok.getLocation());
873 unsigned IntSize = Context.Target.getIntWidth();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000874 return Owned(new (Context) IntegerLiteral(llvm::APInt(IntSize, Val-'0'),
Steve Naroffe5f128a2009-01-20 19:53:53 +0000875 Context.IntTy, Tok.getLocation()));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000876 }
Ted Kremenekdbde2282009-01-13 23:19:12 +0000877
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000878 llvm::SmallString<512> IntegerBuffer;
Chris Lattner46d91342008-09-30 20:53:45 +0000879 // Add padding so that NumericLiteralParser can overread by one character.
880 IntegerBuffer.resize(Tok.getLength()+1);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000881 const char *ThisTokBegin = &IntegerBuffer[0];
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000882
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000883 // Get the spelling of the token, which eliminates trigraphs, etc.
884 unsigned ActualLength = PP.getSpelling(Tok, ThisTokBegin);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000885
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000886 NumericLiteralParser Literal(ThisTokBegin, ThisTokBegin+ActualLength,
887 Tok.getLocation(), PP);
888 if (Literal.hadError)
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000889 return ExprError();
890
Chris Lattner1de66eb2007-08-26 03:42:43 +0000891 Expr *Res;
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000892
Chris Lattner1de66eb2007-08-26 03:42:43 +0000893 if (Literal.isFloatingLiteral()) {
Chris Lattner858eece2007-09-22 18:29:59 +0000894 QualType Ty;
Chris Lattner2a674dc2008-06-30 18:32:54 +0000895 if (Literal.isFloat)
Chris Lattner858eece2007-09-22 18:29:59 +0000896 Ty = Context.FloatTy;
Chris Lattner2a674dc2008-06-30 18:32:54 +0000897 else if (!Literal.isLong)
Chris Lattner858eece2007-09-22 18:29:59 +0000898 Ty = Context.DoubleTy;
Chris Lattner2a674dc2008-06-30 18:32:54 +0000899 else
Chris Lattnerfc18dcc2008-03-08 08:52:55 +0000900 Ty = Context.LongDoubleTy;
Chris Lattner2a674dc2008-06-30 18:32:54 +0000901
902 const llvm::fltSemantics &Format = Context.getFloatTypeSemantics(Ty);
903
Ted Kremenekddedbe22007-11-29 00:56:49 +0000904 // isExact will be set by GetFloatValue().
905 bool isExact = false;
Sebastian Redl75324932009-01-20 22:23:13 +0000906 Res = new (Context) FloatingLiteral(Literal.GetFloatValue(Format, &isExact),
907 &isExact, Ty, Tok.getLocation());
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000908
Chris Lattner1de66eb2007-08-26 03:42:43 +0000909 } else if (!Literal.isIntegerLiteral()) {
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000910 return ExprError();
Chris Lattner1de66eb2007-08-26 03:42:43 +0000911 } else {
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000912 QualType Ty;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000913
Neil Booth7421e9c2007-08-29 22:00:19 +0000914 // long long is a C99 feature.
915 if (!getLangOptions().C99 && !getLangOptions().CPlusPlus0x &&
Neil Booth9bd47082007-08-29 22:13:52 +0000916 Literal.isLongLong)
Neil Booth7421e9c2007-08-29 22:00:19 +0000917 Diag(Tok.getLocation(), diag::ext_longlong);
918
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000919 // Get the value in the widest-possible width.
Chris Lattner8cd0e932008-03-05 18:54:05 +0000920 llvm::APInt ResultVal(Context.Target.getIntMaxTWidth(), 0);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000921
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000922 if (Literal.GetIntegerValue(ResultVal)) {
923 // If this value didn't fit into uintmax_t, warn and force to ull.
924 Diag(Tok.getLocation(), diag::warn_integer_too_large);
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000925 Ty = Context.UnsignedLongLongTy;
926 assert(Context.getTypeSize(Ty) == ResultVal.getBitWidth() &&
Chris Lattner8cd0e932008-03-05 18:54:05 +0000927 "long long is not intmax_t?");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000928 } else {
929 // If this value fits into a ULL, try to figure out what else it fits into
930 // according to the rules of C99 6.4.4.1p5.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000931
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000932 // Octal, Hexadecimal, and integers with a U suffix are allowed to
933 // be an unsigned int.
934 bool AllowUnsigned = Literal.isUnsigned || Literal.getRadix() != 10;
935
936 // Check from smallest to largest, picking the smallest type we can.
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000937 unsigned Width = 0;
Chris Lattner98540b62007-08-23 21:58:08 +0000938 if (!Literal.isLong && !Literal.isLongLong) {
939 // Are int/unsigned possibilities?
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000940 unsigned IntSize = Context.Target.getIntWidth();
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000941
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000942 // Does it fit in a unsigned int?
943 if (ResultVal.isIntN(IntSize)) {
944 // Does it fit in a signed int?
945 if (!Literal.isUnsigned && ResultVal[IntSize-1] == 0)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000946 Ty = Context.IntTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000947 else if (AllowUnsigned)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000948 Ty = Context.UnsignedIntTy;
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000949 Width = IntSize;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000950 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000951 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000952
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000953 // Are long/unsigned long possibilities?
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000954 if (Ty.isNull() && !Literal.isLongLong) {
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000955 unsigned LongSize = Context.Target.getLongWidth();
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000956
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000957 // Does it fit in a unsigned long?
958 if (ResultVal.isIntN(LongSize)) {
959 // Does it fit in a signed long?
960 if (!Literal.isUnsigned && ResultVal[LongSize-1] == 0)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000961 Ty = Context.LongTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000962 else if (AllowUnsigned)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000963 Ty = Context.UnsignedLongTy;
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000964 Width = LongSize;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000965 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000966 }
967
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000968 // Finally, check long long if needed.
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000969 if (Ty.isNull()) {
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000970 unsigned LongLongSize = Context.Target.getLongLongWidth();
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000971
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000972 // Does it fit in a unsigned long long?
973 if (ResultVal.isIntN(LongLongSize)) {
974 // Does it fit in a signed long long?
975 if (!Literal.isUnsigned && ResultVal[LongLongSize-1] == 0)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000976 Ty = Context.LongLongTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000977 else if (AllowUnsigned)
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000978 Ty = Context.UnsignedLongLongTy;
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000979 Width = LongLongSize;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000980 }
981 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000982
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000983 // If we still couldn't decide a type, we probably have something that
984 // does not fit in a signed long long, but has no U suffix.
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000985 if (Ty.isNull()) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000986 Diag(Tok.getLocation(), diag::warn_integer_too_large_for_signed);
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +0000987 Ty = Context.UnsignedLongLongTy;
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000988 Width = Context.Target.getLongLongWidth();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000989 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000990
Chris Lattnere4068872008-05-09 05:59:00 +0000991 if (ResultVal.getBitWidth() != Width)
992 ResultVal.trunc(Width);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000993 }
Sebastian Redl75324932009-01-20 22:23:13 +0000994 Res = new (Context) IntegerLiteral(ResultVal, Ty, Tok.getLocation());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +0000995 }
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +0000996
Chris Lattner1de66eb2007-08-26 03:42:43 +0000997 // If this is an imaginary literal, create the ImaginaryLiteral wrapper.
998 if (Literal.isImaginary)
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +0000999 Res = new (Context) ImaginaryLiteral(Res,
1000 Context.getComplexType(Res->getType()));
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001001
1002 return Owned(Res);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001003}
1004
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001005Action::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnParenExpr(SourceLocation L,
1006 SourceLocation R, ExprArg Val) {
1007 Expr *E = (Expr *)Val.release();
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00001008 assert((E != 0) && "ActOnParenExpr() missing expr");
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001009 return Owned(new (Context) ParenExpr(L, R, E));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001010}
1011
1012/// The UsualUnaryConversions() function is *not* called by this routine.
1013/// See C99 6.3.2.1p[2-4] for more details.
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001014bool Sema::CheckSizeOfAlignOfOperand(QualType exprType,
1015 SourceLocation OpLoc,
1016 const SourceRange &ExprRange,
1017 bool isSizeof) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001018 // C99 6.5.3.4p1:
Chris Lattner159fe082009-01-24 19:46:37 +00001019 if (isa<FunctionType>(exprType)) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001020 // alignof(function) is allowed.
Chris Lattner159fe082009-01-24 19:46:37 +00001021 if (isSizeof)
1022 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_sizeof_function_type) << ExprRange;
1023 return false;
1024 }
1025
1026 if (exprType->isVoidType()) {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001027 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_sizeof_void_type)
1028 << (isSizeof ? "sizeof" : "__alignof") << ExprRange;
Chris Lattner159fe082009-01-24 19:46:37 +00001029 return false;
1030 }
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001031
Chris Lattner159fe082009-01-24 19:46:37 +00001032 return DiagnoseIncompleteType(OpLoc, exprType,
1033 isSizeof ? diag::err_sizeof_incomplete_type :
1034 diag::err_alignof_incomplete_type,
1035 ExprRange);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001036}
1037
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001038/// ActOnSizeOfAlignOfExpr - Handle @c sizeof(type) and @c sizeof @c expr and
1039/// the same for @c alignof and @c __alignof
1040/// Note that the ArgRange is invalid if isType is false.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001041Action::OwningExprResult
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001042Sema::ActOnSizeOfAlignOfExpr(SourceLocation OpLoc, bool isSizeof, bool isType,
1043 void *TyOrEx, const SourceRange &ArgRange) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001044 // If error parsing type, ignore.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001045 if (TyOrEx == 0) return ExprError();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001046
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001047 QualType ArgTy;
1048 SourceRange Range;
1049 if (isType) {
1050 ArgTy = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(TyOrEx);
1051 Range = ArgRange;
1052 } else {
1053 // Get the end location.
1054 Expr *ArgEx = (Expr *)TyOrEx;
1055 Range = ArgEx->getSourceRange();
1056 ArgTy = ArgEx->getType();
1057 }
1058
1059 // Verify that the operand is valid.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001060 // FIXME: This might leak the expression.
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001061 if (CheckSizeOfAlignOfOperand(ArgTy, OpLoc, Range, isSizeof))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001062 return ExprError();
Sebastian Redl0cb7c872008-11-11 17:56:53 +00001063
1064 // C99 6.5.3.4p4: the type (an unsigned integer type) is size_t.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001065 return Owned(new (Context) SizeOfAlignOfExpr(isSizeof, isType, TyOrEx,
Chris Lattner159fe082009-01-24 19:46:37 +00001066 Context.getSizeType(), OpLoc,
1067 Range.getEnd()));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001068}
1069
Chris Lattner5110ad52007-08-24 21:41:10 +00001070QualType Sema::CheckRealImagOperand(Expr *&V, SourceLocation Loc) {
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00001071 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(V);
1072
Chris Lattnera16e42d2007-08-26 05:39:26 +00001073 // These operators return the element type of a complex type.
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00001074 if (const ComplexType *CT = V->getType()->getAsComplexType())
1075 return CT->getElementType();
Chris Lattnera16e42d2007-08-26 05:39:26 +00001076
1077 // Otherwise they pass through real integer and floating point types here.
1078 if (V->getType()->isArithmeticType())
1079 return V->getType();
1080
1081 // Reject anything else.
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00001082 Diag(Loc, diag::err_realimag_invalid_type) << V->getType();
Chris Lattnera16e42d2007-08-26 05:39:26 +00001083 return QualType();
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00001084}
1085
1086
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001087
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001088Action::OwningExprResult
1089Sema::ActOnPostfixUnaryOp(Scope *S, SourceLocation OpLoc,
1090 tok::TokenKind Kind, ExprArg Input) {
1091 Expr *Arg = (Expr *)Input.get();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001092
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001093 UnaryOperator::Opcode Opc;
1094 switch (Kind) {
1095 default: assert(0 && "Unknown unary op!");
1096 case tok::plusplus: Opc = UnaryOperator::PostInc; break;
1097 case tok::minusminus: Opc = UnaryOperator::PostDec; break;
1098 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001099
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001100 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus &&
1101 (Arg->getType()->isRecordType() || Arg->getType()->isEnumeralType())) {
1102 // Which overloaded operator?
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001103 OverloadedOperatorKind OverOp =
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001104 (Opc == UnaryOperator::PostInc)? OO_PlusPlus : OO_MinusMinus;
1105
1106 // C++ [over.inc]p1:
1107 //
1108 // [...] If the function is a member function with one
1109 // parameter (which shall be of type int) or a non-member
1110 // function with two parameters (the second of which shall be
1111 // of type int), it defines the postfix increment operator ++
1112 // for objects of that type. When the postfix increment is
1113 // called as a result of using the ++ operator, the int
1114 // argument will have value zero.
1115 Expr *Args[2] = {
1116 Arg,
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001117 new (Context) IntegerLiteral(llvm::APInt(Context.Target.getIntWidth(), 0,
1118 /*isSigned=*/true), Context.IntTy, SourceLocation())
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001119 };
1120
1121 // Build the candidate set for overloading
1122 OverloadCandidateSet CandidateSet;
1123 AddOperatorCandidates(OverOp, S, Args, 2, CandidateSet);
1124
1125 // Perform overload resolution.
1126 OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best;
1127 switch (BestViableFunction(CandidateSet, Best)) {
1128 case OR_Success: {
1129 // We found a built-in operator or an overloaded operator.
1130 FunctionDecl *FnDecl = Best->Function;
1131
1132 if (FnDecl) {
1133 // We matched an overloaded operator. Build a call to that
1134 // operator.
1135
1136 // Convert the arguments.
1137 if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FnDecl)) {
1138 if (PerformObjectArgumentInitialization(Arg, Method))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001139 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001140 } else {
1141 // Convert the arguments.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001142 if (PerformCopyInitialization(Arg,
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001143 FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
1144 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001145 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001146 }
1147
1148 // Determine the result type
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001149 QualType ResultTy
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001150 = FnDecl->getType()->getAsFunctionType()->getResultType();
1151 ResultTy = ResultTy.getNonReferenceType();
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001152
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001153 // Build the actual expression node.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001154 Expr *FnExpr = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(FnDecl, FnDecl->getType(),
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001155 SourceLocation());
1156 UsualUnaryConversions(FnExpr);
1157
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001158 Input.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001159 return Owned(new (Context)CXXOperatorCallExpr(FnExpr, Args, 2, ResultTy,
Steve Naroffe5f128a2009-01-20 19:53:53 +00001160 OpLoc));
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001161 } else {
1162 // We matched a built-in operator. Convert the arguments, then
1163 // break out so that we will build the appropriate built-in
1164 // operator node.
1165 if (PerformCopyInitialization(Arg, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[0],
1166 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001167 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001168
1169 break;
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001170 }
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001171 }
1172
1173 case OR_No_Viable_Function:
1174 // No viable function; fall through to handling this as a
1175 // built-in operator, which will produce an error message for us.
1176 break;
1177
1178 case OR_Ambiguous:
1179 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_ovl_ambiguous_oper)
1180 << UnaryOperator::getOpcodeStr(Opc)
1181 << Arg->getSourceRange();
1182 PrintOverloadCandidates(CandidateSet, /*OnlyViable=*/true);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001183 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00001184 }
1185
1186 // Either we found no viable overloaded operator or we matched a
1187 // built-in operator. In either case, fall through to trying to
1188 // build a built-in operation.
1189 }
1190
Sebastian Redl0440c8c2008-12-20 09:35:34 +00001191 QualType result = CheckIncrementDecrementOperand(Arg, OpLoc,
1192 Opc == UnaryOperator::PostInc);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001193 if (result.isNull())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001194 return ExprError();
1195 Input.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001196 return Owned(new (Context) UnaryOperator(Arg, Opc, result, OpLoc));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001197}
1198
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001199Action::OwningExprResult
1200Sema::ActOnArraySubscriptExpr(Scope *S, ExprArg Base, SourceLocation LLoc,
1201 ExprArg Idx, SourceLocation RLoc) {
1202 Expr *LHSExp = static_cast<Expr*>(Base.get()),
1203 *RHSExp = static_cast<Expr*>(Idx.get());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001204
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001205 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus &&
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001206 (LHSExp->getType()->isRecordType() ||
Eli Friedmane658bf52008-12-15 22:34:21 +00001207 LHSExp->getType()->isEnumeralType() ||
1208 RHSExp->getType()->isRecordType() ||
1209 RHSExp->getType()->isEnumeralType())) {
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001210 // Add the appropriate overloaded operators (C++ [over.match.oper])
1211 // to the candidate set.
1212 OverloadCandidateSet CandidateSet;
1213 Expr *Args[2] = { LHSExp, RHSExp };
1214 AddOperatorCandidates(OO_Subscript, S, Args, 2, CandidateSet);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001215
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001216 // Perform overload resolution.
1217 OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best;
1218 switch (BestViableFunction(CandidateSet, Best)) {
1219 case OR_Success: {
1220 // We found a built-in operator or an overloaded operator.
1221 FunctionDecl *FnDecl = Best->Function;
1222
1223 if (FnDecl) {
1224 // We matched an overloaded operator. Build a call to that
1225 // operator.
1226
1227 // Convert the arguments.
1228 if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FnDecl)) {
1229 if (PerformObjectArgumentInitialization(LHSExp, Method) ||
1230 PerformCopyInitialization(RHSExp,
1231 FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
1232 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001233 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001234 } else {
1235 // Convert the arguments.
1236 if (PerformCopyInitialization(LHSExp,
1237 FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
1238 "passing") ||
1239 PerformCopyInitialization(RHSExp,
1240 FnDecl->getParamDecl(1)->getType(),
1241 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001242 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001243 }
1244
1245 // Determine the result type
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001246 QualType ResultTy
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001247 = FnDecl->getType()->getAsFunctionType()->getResultType();
1248 ResultTy = ResultTy.getNonReferenceType();
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001249
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001250 // Build the actual expression node.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001251 Expr *FnExpr = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(FnDecl, FnDecl->getType(),
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001252 SourceLocation());
1253 UsualUnaryConversions(FnExpr);
1254
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001255 Base.release();
1256 Idx.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001257 return Owned(new (Context) CXXOperatorCallExpr(FnExpr, Args, 2,
1258 ResultTy, LLoc));
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001259 } else {
1260 // We matched a built-in operator. Convert the arguments, then
1261 // break out so that we will build the appropriate built-in
1262 // operator node.
1263 if (PerformCopyInitialization(LHSExp, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[0],
1264 "passing") ||
1265 PerformCopyInitialization(RHSExp, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[1],
1266 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001267 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001268
1269 break;
1270 }
1271 }
1272
1273 case OR_No_Viable_Function:
1274 // No viable function; fall through to handling this as a
1275 // built-in operator, which will produce an error message for us.
1276 break;
1277
1278 case OR_Ambiguous:
1279 Diag(LLoc, diag::err_ovl_ambiguous_oper)
1280 << "[]"
1281 << LHSExp->getSourceRange() << RHSExp->getSourceRange();
1282 PrintOverloadCandidates(CandidateSet, /*OnlyViable=*/true);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001283 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor80723c52008-11-19 17:17:41 +00001284 }
1285
1286 // Either we found no viable overloaded operator or we matched a
1287 // built-in operator. In either case, fall through to trying to
1288 // build a built-in operation.
1289 }
1290
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001291 // Perform default conversions.
1292 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(LHSExp);
1293 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(RHSExp);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001294
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001295 QualType LHSTy = LHSExp->getType(), RHSTy = RHSExp->getType();
1296
1297 // C99 6.5.2.1p2: the expression e1[e2] is by definition precisely equivalent
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00001298 // to the expression *((e1)+(e2)). This means the array "Base" may actually be
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001299 // in the subscript position. As a result, we need to derive the array base
1300 // and index from the expression types.
1301 Expr *BaseExpr, *IndexExpr;
1302 QualType ResultType;
Chris Lattner7931f4a2007-07-31 16:53:04 +00001303 if (const PointerType *PTy = LHSTy->getAsPointerType()) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001304 BaseExpr = LHSExp;
1305 IndexExpr = RHSExp;
1306 // FIXME: need to deal with const...
1307 ResultType = PTy->getPointeeType();
Chris Lattner7931f4a2007-07-31 16:53:04 +00001308 } else if (const PointerType *PTy = RHSTy->getAsPointerType()) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001309 // Handle the uncommon case of "123[Ptr]".
1310 BaseExpr = RHSExp;
1311 IndexExpr = LHSExp;
1312 // FIXME: need to deal with const...
1313 ResultType = PTy->getPointeeType();
Chris Lattnere35a1042007-07-31 19:29:30 +00001314 } else if (const VectorType *VTy = LHSTy->getAsVectorType()) {
1315 BaseExpr = LHSExp; // vectors: V[123]
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001316 IndexExpr = RHSExp;
Nate Begeman57385472009-01-18 00:45:31 +00001317
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001318 // FIXME: need to deal with const...
1319 ResultType = VTy->getElementType();
1320 } else {
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001321 return ExprError(Diag(LHSExp->getLocStart(),
1322 diag::err_typecheck_subscript_value) << RHSExp->getSourceRange());
1323 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001324 // C99 6.5.2.1p1
1325 if (!IndexExpr->getType()->isIntegerType())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001326 return ExprError(Diag(IndexExpr->getLocStart(),
1327 diag::err_typecheck_subscript) << IndexExpr->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001328
1329 // C99 6.5.2.1p1: "shall have type "pointer to *object* type". In practice,
1330 // the following check catches trying to index a pointer to a function (e.g.
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00001331 // void (*)(int)) and pointers to incomplete types. Functions are not
1332 // objects in C99.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001333 if (!ResultType->isObjectType())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001334 return ExprError(Diag(BaseExpr->getLocStart(),
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001335 diag::err_typecheck_subscript_not_object)
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001336 << BaseExpr->getType() << BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001337
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001338 Base.release();
1339 Idx.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001340 return Owned(new (Context) ArraySubscriptExpr(LHSExp, RHSExp,
1341 ResultType, RLoc));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001342}
1343
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001344QualType Sema::
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00001345CheckExtVectorComponent(QualType baseType, SourceLocation OpLoc,
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001346 IdentifierInfo &CompName, SourceLocation CompLoc) {
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00001347 const ExtVectorType *vecType = baseType->getAsExtVectorType();
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001348
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001349 // The vector accessor can't exceed the number of elements.
1350 const char *compStr = CompName.getName();
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001351
1352 // This flag determines whether or not the component is one of the four
1353 // special names that indicate a subset of exactly half the elements are
1354 // to be selected.
1355 bool HalvingSwizzle = false;
1356
1357 // This flag determines whether or not CompName has an 's' char prefix,
1358 // indicating that it is a string of hex values to be used as vector indices.
1359 bool HexSwizzle = *compStr == 's';
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001360
1361 // Check that we've found one of the special components, or that the component
1362 // names must come from the same set.
1363 if (!strcmp(compStr, "hi") || !strcmp(compStr, "lo") ||
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001364 !strcmp(compStr, "even") || !strcmp(compStr, "odd")) {
1365 HalvingSwizzle = true;
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001366 } else if (vecType->getPointAccessorIdx(*compStr) != -1) {
Chris Lattner9096b792007-08-02 22:33:49 +00001367 do
1368 compStr++;
1369 while (*compStr && vecType->getPointAccessorIdx(*compStr) != -1);
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001370 } else if (HexSwizzle || vecType->getNumericAccessorIdx(*compStr) != -1) {
Chris Lattner9096b792007-08-02 22:33:49 +00001371 do
1372 compStr++;
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001373 while (*compStr && vecType->getNumericAccessorIdx(*compStr) != -1);
Chris Lattner9096b792007-08-02 22:33:49 +00001374 }
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001375
1376 if (!HalvingSwizzle && *compStr) {
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001377 // We didn't get to the end of the string. This means the component names
1378 // didn't come from the same set *or* we encountered an illegal name.
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001379 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_ext_vector_component_name_illegal)
1380 << std::string(compStr,compStr+1) << SourceRange(CompLoc);
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001381 return QualType();
1382 }
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001383
1384 // Ensure no component accessor exceeds the width of the vector type it
1385 // operates on.
1386 if (!HalvingSwizzle) {
1387 compStr = CompName.getName();
1388
1389 if (HexSwizzle)
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001390 compStr++;
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001391
1392 while (*compStr) {
1393 if (!vecType->isAccessorWithinNumElements(*compStr++)) {
1394 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_ext_vector_component_exceeds_length)
1395 << baseType << SourceRange(CompLoc);
1396 return QualType();
1397 }
1398 }
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001399 }
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001400
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001401 // If this is a halving swizzle, verify that the base type has an even
1402 // number of elements.
1403 if (HalvingSwizzle && (vecType->getNumElements() & 1U)) {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001404 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_ext_vector_component_requires_even)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00001405 << baseType << SourceRange(CompLoc);
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001406 return QualType();
1407 }
1408
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001409 // The component accessor looks fine - now we need to compute the actual type.
1410 // The vector type is implied by the component accessor. For example,
1411 // vec4.b is a float, vec4.xy is a vec2, vec4.rgb is a vec3, etc.
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001412 // vec4.s0 is a float, vec4.s23 is a vec3, etc.
Nate Begemanc8e51f82008-05-09 06:41:27 +00001413 // vec4.hi, vec4.lo, vec4.e, and vec4.o all return vec2.
Nate Begeman1486b502009-01-18 01:47:54 +00001414 unsigned CompSize = HalvingSwizzle ? vecType->getNumElements() / 2
1415 : CompName.getLength();
1416 if (HexSwizzle)
1417 CompSize--;
1418
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001419 if (CompSize == 1)
1420 return vecType->getElementType();
Steve Naroff82113e32007-07-29 16:33:31 +00001421
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00001422 QualType VT = Context.getExtVectorType(vecType->getElementType(), CompSize);
Steve Naroff82113e32007-07-29 16:33:31 +00001423 // Now look up the TypeDefDecl from the vector type. Without this,
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00001424 // diagostics look bad. We want extended vector types to appear built-in.
1425 for (unsigned i = 0, E = ExtVectorDecls.size(); i != E; ++i) {
1426 if (ExtVectorDecls[i]->getUnderlyingType() == VT)
1427 return Context.getTypedefType(ExtVectorDecls[i]);
Steve Naroff82113e32007-07-29 16:33:31 +00001428 }
1429 return VT; // should never get here (a typedef type should always be found).
Steve Naroff1b8a46c2007-07-27 22:15:19 +00001430}
1431
Fariborz Jahanianc05da422008-11-22 20:25:50 +00001432/// constructSetterName - Return the setter name for the given
1433/// identifier, i.e. "set" + Name where the initial character of Name
1434/// has been capitalized.
1435// FIXME: Merge with same routine in Parser. But where should this
1436// live?
1437static IdentifierInfo *constructSetterName(IdentifierTable &Idents,
1438 const IdentifierInfo *Name) {
1439 llvm::SmallString<100> SelectorName;
1440 SelectorName = "set";
1441 SelectorName.append(Name->getName(), Name->getName()+Name->getLength());
1442 SelectorName[3] = toupper(SelectorName[3]);
1443 return &Idents.get(&SelectorName[0], &SelectorName[SelectorName.size()]);
1444}
1445
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001446Action::OwningExprResult
1447Sema::ActOnMemberReferenceExpr(Scope *S, ExprArg Base, SourceLocation OpLoc,
1448 tok::TokenKind OpKind, SourceLocation MemberLoc,
1449 IdentifierInfo &Member) {
1450 Expr *BaseExpr = static_cast<Expr *>(Base.release());
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001451 assert(BaseExpr && "no record expression");
Steve Naroff137e11d2007-12-16 21:42:28 +00001452
1453 // Perform default conversions.
1454 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(BaseExpr);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001455
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001456 QualType BaseType = BaseExpr->getType();
1457 assert(!BaseType.isNull() && "no type for member expression");
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001458
Chris Lattnerb2b9da72008-07-21 04:36:39 +00001459 // Get the type being accessed in BaseType. If this is an arrow, the BaseExpr
1460 // must have pointer type, and the accessed type is the pointee.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001461 if (OpKind == tok::arrow) {
Chris Lattner7931f4a2007-07-31 16:53:04 +00001462 if (const PointerType *PT = BaseType->getAsPointerType())
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001463 BaseType = PT->getPointeeType();
Douglas Gregor7f3fec52008-11-20 16:27:02 +00001464 else if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && BaseType->isRecordType())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001465 return Owned(BuildOverloadedArrowExpr(S, BaseExpr, OpLoc,
1466 MemberLoc, Member));
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001467 else
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001468 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc,
1469 diag::err_typecheck_member_reference_arrow)
1470 << BaseType << BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001471 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001472
Chris Lattnerb2b9da72008-07-21 04:36:39 +00001473 // Handle field access to simple records. This also handles access to fields
1474 // of the ObjC 'id' struct.
Chris Lattnere35a1042007-07-31 19:29:30 +00001475 if (const RecordType *RTy = BaseType->getAsRecordType()) {
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001476 RecordDecl *RDecl = RTy->getDecl();
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00001477 if (DiagnoseIncompleteType(OpLoc, BaseType,
1478 diag::err_typecheck_incomplete_tag,
1479 BaseExpr->getSourceRange()))
1480 return ExprError();
1481
Steve Naroff2cb66382007-07-26 03:11:44 +00001482 // The record definition is complete, now make sure the member is valid.
Douglas Gregor8acb7272008-12-11 16:49:14 +00001483 // FIXME: Qualified name lookup for C++ is a bit more complicated
1484 // than this.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001485 LookupResult Result
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +00001486 = LookupQualifiedName(RDecl, DeclarationName(&Member),
1487 LookupCriteria(LookupCriteria::Member,
1488 /*RedeclarationOnly=*/false,
1489 getLangOptions().CPlusPlus));
1490
1491 Decl *MemberDecl = 0;
1492 if (!Result)
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001493 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc, diag::err_typecheck_no_member)
1494 << &Member << BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
1495 else if (Result.isAmbiguous()) {
1496 DiagnoseAmbiguousLookup(Result, DeclarationName(&Member),
1497 MemberLoc, BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
1498 return ExprError();
1499 } else
Douglas Gregor29dfa2f2009-01-15 00:26:24 +00001500 MemberDecl = Result;
Douglas Gregor8acb7272008-12-11 16:49:14 +00001501
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001502 if (FieldDecl *FD = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(MemberDecl)) {
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +00001503 // We may have found a field within an anonymous union or struct
1504 // (C++ [class.union]).
1505 if (cast<RecordDecl>(FD->getDeclContext())->isAnonymousStructOrUnion())
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001506 return BuildAnonymousStructUnionMemberReference(MemberLoc, FD,
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001507 BaseExpr, OpLoc);
Douglas Gregor723d3332009-01-07 00:43:41 +00001508
Douglas Gregor82d44772008-12-20 23:49:58 +00001509 // Figure out the type of the member; see C99 6.5.2.3p3, C++ [expr.ref]
1510 // FIXME: Handle address space modifiers
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001511 QualType MemberType = FD->getType();
Douglas Gregor82d44772008-12-20 23:49:58 +00001512 if (const ReferenceType *Ref = MemberType->getAsReferenceType())
1513 MemberType = Ref->getPointeeType();
1514 else {
1515 unsigned combinedQualifiers =
1516 MemberType.getCVRQualifiers() | BaseType.getCVRQualifiers();
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001517 if (FD->isMutable())
Douglas Gregor82d44772008-12-20 23:49:58 +00001518 combinedQualifiers &= ~QualType::Const;
1519 MemberType = MemberType.getQualifiedType(combinedQualifiers);
1520 }
Eli Friedman76b49832008-02-06 22:48:16 +00001521
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001522 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(BaseExpr, OpKind == tok::arrow, FD,
1523 MemberLoc, MemberType));
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001524 } else if (CXXClassVarDecl *Var = dyn_cast<CXXClassVarDecl>(MemberDecl))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001525 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(BaseExpr, OpKind == tok::arrow,
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001526 Var, MemberLoc,
1527 Var->getType().getNonReferenceType()));
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001528 else if (FunctionDecl *MemberFn = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(MemberDecl))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001529 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(BaseExpr, OpKind == tok::arrow,
1530 MemberFn, MemberLoc, MemberFn->getType()));
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001531 else if (OverloadedFunctionDecl *Ovl
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001532 = dyn_cast<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(MemberDecl))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001533 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(BaseExpr, OpKind == tok::arrow, Ovl,
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001534 MemberLoc, Context.OverloadTy));
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001535 else if (EnumConstantDecl *Enum = dyn_cast<EnumConstantDecl>(MemberDecl))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001536 return Owned(new (Context) MemberExpr(BaseExpr, OpKind == tok::arrow, Enum,
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001537 MemberLoc, Enum->getType()));
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00001538 else if (isa<TypeDecl>(MemberDecl))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001539 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc,diag::err_typecheck_member_reference_type)
1540 << DeclarationName(&Member) << int(OpKind == tok::arrow));
Eli Friedman76b49832008-02-06 22:48:16 +00001541
Douglas Gregor82d44772008-12-20 23:49:58 +00001542 // We found a declaration kind that we didn't expect. This is a
1543 // generic error message that tells the user that she can't refer
1544 // to this member with '.' or '->'.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001545 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc,
1546 diag::err_typecheck_member_reference_unknown)
1547 << DeclarationName(&Member) << int(OpKind == tok::arrow));
Chris Lattnera57cf472008-07-21 04:28:12 +00001548 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001549
Chris Lattnere9d71612008-07-21 04:59:05 +00001550 // Handle access to Objective-C instance variables, such as "Obj->ivar" and
1551 // (*Obj).ivar.
Chris Lattnerb2b9da72008-07-21 04:36:39 +00001552 if (const ObjCInterfaceType *IFTy = BaseType->getAsObjCInterfaceType()) {
Fariborz Jahanian09772392008-12-13 22:20:28 +00001553 if (ObjCIvarDecl *IV = IFTy->getDecl()->lookupInstanceVariable(&Member)) {
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001554 ObjCIvarRefExpr *MRef= new (Context) ObjCIvarRefExpr(IV, IV->getType(),
1555 MemberLoc, BaseExpr,
Fariborz Jahanianea944842008-12-18 17:29:46 +00001556 OpKind == tok::arrow);
1557 Context.setFieldDecl(IFTy->getDecl(), IV, MRef);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001558 return Owned(MRef);
Fariborz Jahanian09772392008-12-13 22:20:28 +00001559 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001560 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc, diag::err_typecheck_member_reference_ivar)
1561 << IFTy->getDecl()->getDeclName() << &Member
1562 << BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattnera57cf472008-07-21 04:28:12 +00001563 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001564
Chris Lattnere9d71612008-07-21 04:59:05 +00001565 // Handle Objective-C property access, which is "Obj.property" where Obj is a
1566 // pointer to a (potentially qualified) interface type.
1567 const PointerType *PTy;
1568 const ObjCInterfaceType *IFTy;
1569 if (OpKind == tok::period && (PTy = BaseType->getAsPointerType()) &&
1570 (IFTy = PTy->getPointeeType()->getAsObjCInterfaceType())) {
1571 ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFace = IFTy->getDecl();
Daniel Dunbardd851282008-08-30 05:35:15 +00001572
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001573 // Search for a declared property first.
Chris Lattnere9d71612008-07-21 04:59:05 +00001574 if (ObjCPropertyDecl *PD = IFace->FindPropertyDeclaration(&Member))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001575 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCPropertyRefExpr(PD, PD->getType(),
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001576 MemberLoc, BaseExpr));
1577
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001578 // Check protocols on qualified interfaces.
Chris Lattnerd5f81792008-07-21 05:20:01 +00001579 for (ObjCInterfaceType::qual_iterator I = IFTy->qual_begin(),
1580 E = IFTy->qual_end(); I != E; ++I)
1581 if (ObjCPropertyDecl *PD = (*I)->FindPropertyDeclaration(&Member))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001582 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCPropertyRefExpr(PD, PD->getType(),
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001583 MemberLoc, BaseExpr));
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001584
1585 // If that failed, look for an "implicit" property by seeing if the nullary
1586 // selector is implemented.
1587
1588 // FIXME: The logic for looking up nullary and unary selectors should be
1589 // shared with the code in ActOnInstanceMessage.
1590
1591 Selector Sel = PP.getSelectorTable().getNullarySelector(&Member);
1592 ObjCMethodDecl *Getter = IFace->lookupInstanceMethod(Sel);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001593
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001594 // If this reference is in an @implementation, check for 'private' methods.
1595 if (!Getter)
1596 if (ObjCMethodDecl *CurMeth = getCurMethodDecl())
1597 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ClassDecl = CurMeth->getClassInterface())
1598 if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImpDecl =
1599 ObjCImplementations[ClassDecl->getIdentifier()])
1600 Getter = ImpDecl->getInstanceMethod(Sel);
1601
Steve Naroff04151f32008-10-22 19:16:27 +00001602 // Look through local category implementations associated with the class.
1603 if (!Getter) {
1604 for (unsigned i = 0; i < ObjCCategoryImpls.size() && !Getter; i++) {
1605 if (ObjCCategoryImpls[i]->getClassInterface() == IFace)
1606 Getter = ObjCCategoryImpls[i]->getInstanceMethod(Sel);
1607 }
1608 }
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001609 if (Getter) {
1610 // If we found a getter then this may be a valid dot-reference, we
Fariborz Jahanianc05da422008-11-22 20:25:50 +00001611 // will look for the matching setter, in case it is needed.
1612 IdentifierInfo *SetterName = constructSetterName(PP.getIdentifierTable(),
1613 &Member);
1614 Selector SetterSel = PP.getSelectorTable().getUnarySelector(SetterName);
1615 ObjCMethodDecl *Setter = IFace->lookupInstanceMethod(SetterSel);
1616 if (!Setter) {
1617 // If this reference is in an @implementation, also check for 'private'
1618 // methods.
1619 if (ObjCMethodDecl *CurMeth = getCurMethodDecl())
1620 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *ClassDecl = CurMeth->getClassInterface())
1621 if (ObjCImplementationDecl *ImpDecl =
1622 ObjCImplementations[ClassDecl->getIdentifier()])
1623 Setter = ImpDecl->getInstanceMethod(SetterSel);
1624 }
1625 // Look through local category implementations associated with the class.
1626 if (!Setter) {
1627 for (unsigned i = 0; i < ObjCCategoryImpls.size() && !Setter; i++) {
1628 if (ObjCCategoryImpls[i]->getClassInterface() == IFace)
1629 Setter = ObjCCategoryImpls[i]->getInstanceMethod(SetterSel);
1630 }
1631 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001632
1633 // FIXME: we must check that the setter has property type.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001634 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCKVCRefExpr(Getter, Getter->getResultType(),
1635 Setter, MemberLoc, BaseExpr));
Daniel Dunbar60e8b162008-09-03 01:05:41 +00001636 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001637
1638 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc, diag::err_property_not_found)
1639 << &Member << BaseType);
Fariborz Jahanian4af72492007-11-12 22:29:28 +00001640 }
Steve Naroffd1d44402008-10-20 22:53:06 +00001641 // Handle properties on qualified "id" protocols.
1642 const ObjCQualifiedIdType *QIdTy;
1643 if (OpKind == tok::period && (QIdTy = BaseType->getAsObjCQualifiedIdType())) {
1644 // Check protocols on qualified interfaces.
1645 for (ObjCQualifiedIdType::qual_iterator I = QIdTy->qual_begin(),
Fariborz Jahanian94cc8232008-12-10 00:21:50 +00001646 E = QIdTy->qual_end(); I != E; ++I) {
Steve Naroffd1d44402008-10-20 22:53:06 +00001647 if (ObjCPropertyDecl *PD = (*I)->FindPropertyDeclaration(&Member))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001648 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCPropertyRefExpr(PD, PD->getType(),
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001649 MemberLoc, BaseExpr));
Fariborz Jahanian94cc8232008-12-10 00:21:50 +00001650 // Also must look for a getter name which uses property syntax.
1651 Selector Sel = PP.getSelectorTable().getNullarySelector(&Member);
1652 if (ObjCMethodDecl *OMD = (*I)->getInstanceMethod(Sel)) {
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001653 return Owned(new (Context) ObjCMessageExpr(BaseExpr, Sel,
1654 OMD->getResultType(), OMD, OpLoc, MemberLoc, NULL, 0));
Fariborz Jahanian94cc8232008-12-10 00:21:50 +00001655 }
1656 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001657
1658 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc, diag::err_property_not_found)
1659 << &Member << BaseType);
1660 }
Chris Lattnera57cf472008-07-21 04:28:12 +00001661 // Handle 'field access' to vectors, such as 'V.xx'.
1662 if (BaseType->isExtVectorType() && OpKind == tok::period) {
Chris Lattnera57cf472008-07-21 04:28:12 +00001663 QualType ret = CheckExtVectorComponent(BaseType, OpLoc, Member, MemberLoc);
1664 if (ret.isNull())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001665 return ExprError();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001666 return Owned(new (Context) ExtVectorElementExpr(ret, BaseExpr, Member,
1667 MemberLoc));
Chris Lattnera57cf472008-07-21 04:28:12 +00001668 }
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001669
1670 return ExprError(Diag(MemberLoc,
1671 diag::err_typecheck_member_reference_struct_union)
1672 << BaseType << BaseExpr->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001673}
1674
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001675/// ConvertArgumentsForCall - Converts the arguments specified in
1676/// Args/NumArgs to the parameter types of the function FDecl with
1677/// function prototype Proto. Call is the call expression itself, and
1678/// Fn is the function expression. For a C++ member function, this
1679/// routine does not attempt to convert the object argument. Returns
1680/// true if the call is ill-formed.
1681bool
1682Sema::ConvertArgumentsForCall(CallExpr *Call, Expr *Fn,
1683 FunctionDecl *FDecl,
1684 const FunctionTypeProto *Proto,
1685 Expr **Args, unsigned NumArgs,
1686 SourceLocation RParenLoc) {
1687 // C99 6.5.2.2p7 - the arguments are implicitly converted, as if by
1688 // assignment, to the types of the corresponding parameter, ...
1689 unsigned NumArgsInProto = Proto->getNumArgs();
1690 unsigned NumArgsToCheck = NumArgs;
Douglas Gregor4ac887b2009-01-23 21:30:56 +00001691 bool Invalid = false;
1692
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001693 // If too few arguments are available (and we don't have default
1694 // arguments for the remaining parameters), don't make the call.
1695 if (NumArgs < NumArgsInProto) {
1696 if (!FDecl || NumArgs < FDecl->getMinRequiredArguments())
1697 return Diag(RParenLoc, diag::err_typecheck_call_too_few_args)
1698 << Fn->getType()->isBlockPointerType() << Fn->getSourceRange();
1699 // Use default arguments for missing arguments
1700 NumArgsToCheck = NumArgsInProto;
1701 Call->setNumArgs(NumArgsInProto);
1702 }
1703
1704 // If too many are passed and not variadic, error on the extras and drop
1705 // them.
1706 if (NumArgs > NumArgsInProto) {
1707 if (!Proto->isVariadic()) {
1708 Diag(Args[NumArgsInProto]->getLocStart(),
1709 diag::err_typecheck_call_too_many_args)
1710 << Fn->getType()->isBlockPointerType() << Fn->getSourceRange()
1711 << SourceRange(Args[NumArgsInProto]->getLocStart(),
1712 Args[NumArgs-1]->getLocEnd());
1713 // This deletes the extra arguments.
1714 Call->setNumArgs(NumArgsInProto);
Douglas Gregor4ac887b2009-01-23 21:30:56 +00001715 Invalid = true;
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001716 }
1717 NumArgsToCheck = NumArgsInProto;
1718 }
1719
1720 // Continue to check argument types (even if we have too few/many args).
1721 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgsToCheck; i++) {
1722 QualType ProtoArgType = Proto->getArgType(i);
1723
1724 Expr *Arg;
Douglas Gregor62ae25a2008-12-24 00:01:03 +00001725 if (i < NumArgs) {
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001726 Arg = Args[i];
Douglas Gregor62ae25a2008-12-24 00:01:03 +00001727
1728 // Pass the argument.
1729 if (PerformCopyInitialization(Arg, ProtoArgType, "passing"))
1730 return true;
1731 } else
1732 // We already type-checked the argument, so we know it works.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001733 Arg = new (Context) CXXDefaultArgExpr(FDecl->getParamDecl(i));
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001734 QualType ArgType = Arg->getType();
Douglas Gregor62ae25a2008-12-24 00:01:03 +00001735
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001736 Call->setArg(i, Arg);
1737 }
1738
1739 // If this is a variadic call, handle args passed through "...".
1740 if (Proto->isVariadic()) {
Anders Carlsson4b8e38c2009-01-16 16:48:51 +00001741 VariadicCallType CallType = VariadicFunction;
1742 if (Fn->getType()->isBlockPointerType())
1743 CallType = VariadicBlock; // Block
1744 else if (isa<MemberExpr>(Fn))
1745 CallType = VariadicMethod;
1746
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001747 // Promote the arguments (C99 6.5.2.2p7).
1748 for (unsigned i = NumArgsInProto; i != NumArgs; i++) {
1749 Expr *Arg = Args[i];
Anders Carlsson4b8e38c2009-01-16 16:48:51 +00001750 DefaultVariadicArgumentPromotion(Arg, CallType);
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001751 Call->setArg(i, Arg);
1752 }
1753 }
1754
Douglas Gregor4ac887b2009-01-23 21:30:56 +00001755 return Invalid;
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001756}
1757
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +00001758/// ActOnCallExpr - Handle a call to Fn with the specified array of arguments.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001759/// This provides the location of the left/right parens and a list of comma
1760/// locations.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001761Action::OwningExprResult
1762Sema::ActOnCallExpr(Scope *S, ExprArg fn, SourceLocation LParenLoc,
1763 MultiExprArg args,
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001764 SourceLocation *CommaLocs, SourceLocation RParenLoc) {
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001765 unsigned NumArgs = args.size();
1766 Expr *Fn = static_cast<Expr *>(fn.release());
1767 Expr **Args = reinterpret_cast<Expr**>(args.release());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001768 assert(Fn && "no function call expression");
Chris Lattner3e254fb2008-04-08 04:40:51 +00001769 FunctionDecl *FDecl = NULL;
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001770 OverloadedFunctionDecl *Ovl = NULL;
1771
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +00001772 // Determine whether this is a dependent call inside a C++ template,
1773 // in which case we won't do any semantic analysis now.
1774 bool Dependent = false;
1775 if (Fn->isTypeDependent()) {
1776 if (CXXDependentNameExpr *FnName = dyn_cast<CXXDependentNameExpr>(Fn)) {
1777 if (Expr::hasAnyTypeDependentArguments(Args, NumArgs))
1778 Dependent = true;
1779 else {
1780 // Resolve the CXXDependentNameExpr to an actual identifier;
1781 // it wasn't really a dependent name after all.
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001782 OwningExprResult Resolved
1783 = ActOnDeclarationNameExpr(S, FnName->getLocation(),
1784 FnName->getName(),
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +00001785 /*HasTrailingLParen=*/true,
1786 /*SS=*/0,
1787 /*ForceResolution=*/true);
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001788 if (Resolved.isInvalid())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001789 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +00001790 else {
1791 delete Fn;
Sebastian Redlcd883f72009-01-18 18:53:16 +00001792 Fn = (Expr *)Resolved.release();
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +00001793 }
1794 }
1795 } else
1796 Dependent = true;
1797 } else
1798 Dependent = Expr::hasAnyTypeDependentArguments(Args, NumArgs);
1799
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00001800 // FIXME: Will need to cache the results of name lookup (including
1801 // ADL) in Fn.
Douglas Gregora133e262008-12-06 00:22:45 +00001802 if (Dependent)
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001803 return Owned(new (Context) CallExpr(Fn, Args, NumArgs,
1804 Context.DependentTy, RParenLoc));
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00001805
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001806 // Determine whether this is a call to an object (C++ [over.call.object]).
1807 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && Fn->getType()->isRecordType())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001808 return Owned(BuildCallToObjectOfClassType(S, Fn, LParenLoc, Args, NumArgs,
1809 CommaLocs, RParenLoc));
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001810
1811 // Determine whether this is a call to a member function.
1812 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
1813 if (MemberExpr *MemExpr = dyn_cast<MemberExpr>(Fn->IgnoreParens()))
1814 if (isa<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(MemExpr->getMemberDecl()) ||
1815 isa<CXXMethodDecl>(MemExpr->getMemberDecl()))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001816 return Owned(BuildCallToMemberFunction(S, Fn, LParenLoc, Args, NumArgs,
1817 CommaLocs, RParenLoc));
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001818 }
1819
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001820 // If we're directly calling a function or a set of overloaded
1821 // functions, get the appropriate declaration.
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +00001822 DeclRefExpr *DRExpr = NULL;
1823 if (ImplicitCastExpr *IcExpr = dyn_cast<ImplicitCastExpr>(Fn))
1824 DRExpr = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(IcExpr->getSubExpr());
1825 else
1826 DRExpr = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(Fn);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001827
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +00001828 if (DRExpr) {
1829 FDecl = dyn_cast<FunctionDecl>(DRExpr->getDecl());
1830 Ovl = dyn_cast<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(DRExpr->getDecl());
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001831 }
1832
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001833 if (Ovl) {
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001834 FDecl = ResolveOverloadedCallFn(Fn, Ovl, LParenLoc, Args, NumArgs,
1835 CommaLocs, RParenLoc);
Douglas Gregorbf4f0582008-11-26 06:01:48 +00001836 if (!FDecl)
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001837 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001838
Douglas Gregorbf4f0582008-11-26 06:01:48 +00001839 // Update Fn to refer to the actual function selected.
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +00001840 Expr *NewFn = 0;
1841 if (QualifiedDeclRefExpr *QDRExpr = dyn_cast<QualifiedDeclRefExpr>(DRExpr))
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001842 NewFn = new (Context) QualifiedDeclRefExpr(FDecl, FDecl->getType(),
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +00001843 QDRExpr->getLocation(), false, false,
1844 QDRExpr->getSourceRange().getBegin());
1845 else
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001846 NewFn = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(FDecl, FDecl->getType(),
1847 Fn->getSourceRange().getBegin());
Douglas Gregorbf4f0582008-11-26 06:01:48 +00001848 Fn->Destroy(Context);
1849 Fn = NewFn;
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00001850 }
Chris Lattner3e254fb2008-04-08 04:40:51 +00001851
1852 // Promote the function operand.
1853 UsualUnaryConversions(Fn);
1854
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001855 // Make the call expr early, before semantic checks. This guarantees cleanup
1856 // of arguments and function on error.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001857 // FIXME: Except that llvm::OwningPtr uses delete, when it really must be
1858 // Destroy(), or nothing gets cleaned up.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001859 llvm::OwningPtr<CallExpr> TheCall(new (Context) CallExpr(Fn, Args, NumArgs,
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001860 Context.BoolTy, RParenLoc));
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001861
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +00001862 const FunctionType *FuncT;
1863 if (!Fn->getType()->isBlockPointerType()) {
1864 // C99 6.5.2.2p1 - "The expression that denotes the called function shall
1865 // have type pointer to function".
1866 const PointerType *PT = Fn->getType()->getAsPointerType();
1867 if (PT == 0)
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001868 return ExprError(Diag(LParenLoc, diag::err_typecheck_call_not_function)
1869 << Fn->getType() << Fn->getSourceRange());
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +00001870 FuncT = PT->getPointeeType()->getAsFunctionType();
1871 } else { // This is a block call.
1872 FuncT = Fn->getType()->getAsBlockPointerType()->getPointeeType()->
1873 getAsFunctionType();
1874 }
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001875 if (FuncT == 0)
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001876 return ExprError(Diag(LParenLoc, diag::err_typecheck_call_not_function)
1877 << Fn->getType() << Fn->getSourceRange());
1878
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001879 // We know the result type of the call, set it.
Douglas Gregor2aecd1f2008-10-29 02:00:59 +00001880 TheCall->setType(FuncT->getResultType().getNonReferenceType());
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001881
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001882 if (const FunctionTypeProto *Proto = dyn_cast<FunctionTypeProto>(FuncT)) {
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001883 if (ConvertArgumentsForCall(&*TheCall, Fn, FDecl, Proto, Args, NumArgs,
1884 RParenLoc))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001885 return ExprError();
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001886 } else {
1887 assert(isa<FunctionTypeNoProto>(FuncT) && "Unknown FunctionType!");
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001888
Steve Naroffdb65e052007-08-28 23:30:39 +00001889 // Promote the arguments (C99 6.5.2.2p6).
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001890 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumArgs; i++) {
1891 Expr *Arg = Args[i];
1892 DefaultArgumentPromotion(Arg);
1893 TheCall->setArg(i, Arg);
Steve Naroffdb65e052007-08-28 23:30:39 +00001894 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001895 }
Chris Lattner83bd5eb2007-12-28 05:29:59 +00001896
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001897 if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast_or_null<CXXMethodDecl>(FDecl))
1898 if (!Method->isStatic())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001899 return ExprError(Diag(LParenLoc, diag::err_member_call_without_object)
1900 << Fn->getSourceRange());
Douglas Gregor3257fb52008-12-22 05:46:06 +00001901
Chris Lattner2e64c072007-08-10 20:18:51 +00001902 // Do special checking on direct calls to functions.
Eli Friedmand0e9d092008-05-14 19:38:39 +00001903 if (FDecl)
1904 return CheckFunctionCall(FDecl, TheCall.take());
Chris Lattner2e64c072007-08-10 20:18:51 +00001905
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00001906 return Owned(TheCall.take());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001907}
1908
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001909Action::OwningExprResult
1910Sema::ActOnCompoundLiteral(SourceLocation LParenLoc, TypeTy *Ty,
1911 SourceLocation RParenLoc, ExprArg InitExpr) {
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +00001912 assert((Ty != 0) && "ActOnCompoundLiteral(): missing type");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001913 QualType literalType = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(Ty);
1914 // FIXME: put back this assert when initializers are worked out.
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +00001915 //assert((InitExpr != 0) && "ActOnCompoundLiteral(): missing expression");
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001916 Expr *literalExpr = static_cast<Expr*>(InitExpr.get());
Anders Carlsson9374b852007-12-05 07:24:19 +00001917
Eli Friedman8c2173d2008-05-20 05:22:08 +00001918 if (literalType->isArrayType()) {
Chris Lattnera1923f62008-08-04 07:31:14 +00001919 if (literalType->isVariableArrayType())
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001920 return ExprError(Diag(LParenLoc, diag::err_variable_object_no_init)
1921 << SourceRange(LParenLoc, literalExpr->getSourceRange().getEnd()));
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00001922 } else if (DiagnoseIncompleteType(LParenLoc, literalType,
1923 diag::err_typecheck_decl_incomplete_type,
1924 SourceRange(LParenLoc, literalExpr->getSourceRange().getEnd())))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001925 return ExprError();
Eli Friedman8c2173d2008-05-20 05:22:08 +00001926
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001927 if (CheckInitializerTypes(literalExpr, literalType, LParenLoc,
Douglas Gregor6214d8a2009-01-14 15:45:31 +00001928 DeclarationName(), /*FIXME:DirectInit=*/false))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001929 return ExprError();
Steve Naroffbe37fc02008-01-14 18:19:28 +00001930
Chris Lattnere5cb5862008-12-04 23:50:19 +00001931 bool isFileScope = getCurFunctionOrMethodDecl() == 0;
Steve Naroffbe37fc02008-01-14 18:19:28 +00001932 if (isFileScope) { // 6.5.2.5p3
Steve Narofff0b23542008-01-10 22:15:12 +00001933 if (CheckForConstantInitializer(literalExpr, literalType))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001934 return ExprError();
Steve Narofff0b23542008-01-10 22:15:12 +00001935 }
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001936 InitExpr.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001937 return Owned(new (Context) CompoundLiteralExpr(LParenLoc, literalType,
1938 literalExpr, isFileScope));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001939}
1940
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001941Action::OwningExprResult
1942Sema::ActOnInitList(SourceLocation LBraceLoc, MultiExprArg initlist,
1943 InitListDesignations &Designators,
1944 SourceLocation RBraceLoc) {
1945 unsigned NumInit = initlist.size();
1946 Expr **InitList = reinterpret_cast<Expr**>(initlist.release());
Anders Carlsson762b7c72007-08-31 04:56:16 +00001947
Steve Naroff0acc9c92007-09-15 18:49:24 +00001948 // Semantic analysis for initializers is done by ActOnDeclarator() and
Steve Naroff1c9de712007-09-03 01:24:23 +00001949 // CheckInitializer() - it requires knowledge of the object being intialized.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001950
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00001951 InitListExpr *E = new (Context) InitListExpr(LBraceLoc, InitList, NumInit,
1952 RBraceLoc, Designators.hasAnyDesignators());
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00001953 E->setType(Context.VoidTy); // FIXME: just a place holder for now.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00001954 return Owned(E);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00001955}
1956
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001957/// CheckCastTypes - Check type constraints for casting between types.
Daniel Dunbar5ad49de2008-08-20 03:55:42 +00001958bool Sema::CheckCastTypes(SourceRange TyR, QualType castType, Expr *&castExpr) {
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001959 UsualUnaryConversions(castExpr);
1960
1961 // C99 6.5.4p2: the cast type needs to be void or scalar and the expression
1962 // type needs to be scalar.
1963 if (castType->isVoidType()) {
1964 // Cast to void allows any expr type.
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00001965 } else if (castType->isDependentType() || castExpr->isTypeDependent()) {
1966 // We can't check any more until template instantiation time.
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001967 } else if (!castType->isScalarType() && !castType->isVectorType()) {
Seo Sanghyeon27b33952009-01-15 04:51:39 +00001968 if (Context.getCanonicalType(castType).getUnqualifiedType() ==
1969 Context.getCanonicalType(castExpr->getType().getUnqualifiedType()) &&
1970 (castType->isStructureType() || castType->isUnionType())) {
1971 // GCC struct/union extension: allow cast to self.
1972 Diag(TyR.getBegin(), diag::ext_typecheck_cast_nonscalar)
1973 << castType << castExpr->getSourceRange();
1974 } else if (castType->isUnionType()) {
1975 // GCC cast to union extension
1976 RecordDecl *RD = castType->getAsRecordType()->getDecl();
1977 RecordDecl::field_iterator Field, FieldEnd;
1978 for (Field = RD->field_begin(), FieldEnd = RD->field_end();
1979 Field != FieldEnd; ++Field) {
1980 if (Context.getCanonicalType(Field->getType()).getUnqualifiedType() ==
1981 Context.getCanonicalType(castExpr->getType()).getUnqualifiedType()) {
1982 Diag(TyR.getBegin(), diag::ext_typecheck_cast_to_union)
1983 << castExpr->getSourceRange();
1984 break;
1985 }
1986 }
1987 if (Field == FieldEnd)
1988 return Diag(TyR.getBegin(), diag::err_typecheck_cast_to_union_no_type)
1989 << castExpr->getType() << castExpr->getSourceRange();
1990 } else {
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001991 // Reject any other conversions to non-scalar types.
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001992 return Diag(TyR.getBegin(), diag::err_typecheck_cond_expect_scalar)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00001993 << castType << castExpr->getSourceRange();
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001994 }
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00001995 } else if (!castExpr->getType()->isScalarType() &&
1996 !castExpr->getType()->isVectorType()) {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00001997 return Diag(castExpr->getLocStart(),
1998 diag::err_typecheck_expect_scalar_operand)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00001999 << castExpr->getType() << castExpr->getSourceRange();
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00002000 } else if (castExpr->getType()->isVectorType()) {
2001 if (CheckVectorCast(TyR, castExpr->getType(), castType))
2002 return true;
2003 } else if (castType->isVectorType()) {
2004 if (CheckVectorCast(TyR, castType, castExpr->getType()))
2005 return true;
2006 }
2007 return false;
2008}
2009
Chris Lattnerd1f26b32007-12-20 00:44:32 +00002010bool Sema::CheckVectorCast(SourceRange R, QualType VectorTy, QualType Ty) {
Anders Carlssonf257b4c2007-11-27 05:51:55 +00002011 assert(VectorTy->isVectorType() && "Not a vector type!");
2012
2013 if (Ty->isVectorType() || Ty->isIntegerType()) {
Chris Lattner8cd0e932008-03-05 18:54:05 +00002014 if (Context.getTypeSize(VectorTy) != Context.getTypeSize(Ty))
Anders Carlssonf257b4c2007-11-27 05:51:55 +00002015 return Diag(R.getBegin(),
2016 Ty->isVectorType() ?
2017 diag::err_invalid_conversion_between_vectors :
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002018 diag::err_invalid_conversion_between_vector_and_integer)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002019 << VectorTy << Ty << R;
Anders Carlssonf257b4c2007-11-27 05:51:55 +00002020 } else
2021 return Diag(R.getBegin(),
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002022 diag::err_invalid_conversion_between_vector_and_scalar)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002023 << VectorTy << Ty << R;
Anders Carlssonf257b4c2007-11-27 05:51:55 +00002024
2025 return false;
2026}
2027
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002028Action::OwningExprResult
2029Sema::ActOnCastExpr(SourceLocation LParenLoc, TypeTy *Ty,
2030 SourceLocation RParenLoc, ExprArg Op) {
2031 assert((Ty != 0) && (Op.get() != 0) &&
2032 "ActOnCastExpr(): missing type or expr");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002033
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002034 Expr *castExpr = static_cast<Expr*>(Op.release());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002035 QualType castType = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(Ty);
2036
Argiris Kirtzidis95de23a2008-08-16 20:27:34 +00002037 if (CheckCastTypes(SourceRange(LParenLoc, RParenLoc), castType, castExpr))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002038 return ExprError();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00002039 return Owned(new (Context) CStyleCastExpr(castType, castExpr, castType,
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002040 LParenLoc, RParenLoc));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002041}
2042
Chris Lattner98a425c2007-11-26 01:40:58 +00002043/// Note that lex is not null here, even if this is the gnu "x ?: y" extension.
2044/// In that case, lex = cond.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002045inline QualType Sema::CheckConditionalOperands( // C99 6.5.15
2046 Expr *&cond, Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation questionLoc) {
2047 UsualUnaryConversions(cond);
2048 UsualUnaryConversions(lex);
2049 UsualUnaryConversions(rex);
2050 QualType condT = cond->getType();
2051 QualType lexT = lex->getType();
2052 QualType rexT = rex->getType();
2053
2054 // first, check the condition.
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00002055 if (!cond->isTypeDependent()) {
2056 if (!condT->isScalarType()) { // C99 6.5.15p2
2057 Diag(cond->getLocStart(), diag::err_typecheck_cond_expect_scalar) << condT;
2058 return QualType();
2059 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002060 }
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002061
2062 // Now check the two expressions.
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00002063 if ((lex && lex->isTypeDependent()) || (rex && rex->isTypeDependent()))
2064 return Context.DependentTy;
2065
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002066 // If both operands have arithmetic type, do the usual arithmetic conversions
2067 // to find a common type: C99 6.5.15p3,5.
2068 if (lexT->isArithmeticType() && rexT->isArithmeticType()) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002069 UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex);
2070 return lex->getType();
2071 }
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002072
2073 // If both operands are the same structure or union type, the result is that
2074 // type.
Chris Lattner71225142007-07-31 21:27:01 +00002075 if (const RecordType *LHSRT = lexT->getAsRecordType()) { // C99 6.5.15p3
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002076 if (const RecordType *RHSRT = rexT->getAsRecordType())
Chris Lattner98a425c2007-11-26 01:40:58 +00002077 if (LHSRT->getDecl() == RHSRT->getDecl())
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002078 // "If both the operands have structure or union type, the result has
2079 // that type." This implies that CV qualifiers are dropped.
2080 return lexT.getUnqualifiedType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002081 }
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002082
2083 // C99 6.5.15p5: "If both operands have void type, the result has void type."
Steve Naroff95cb3892008-05-12 21:44:38 +00002084 // The following || allows only one side to be void (a GCC-ism).
2085 if (lexT->isVoidType() || rexT->isVoidType()) {
Eli Friedmanf025aac2008-06-04 19:47:51 +00002086 if (!lexT->isVoidType())
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00002087 Diag(rex->getLocStart(), diag::ext_typecheck_cond_one_void)
2088 << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff95cb3892008-05-12 21:44:38 +00002089 if (!rexT->isVoidType())
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00002090 Diag(lex->getLocStart(), diag::ext_typecheck_cond_one_void)
2091 << lex->getSourceRange();
Eli Friedmanf025aac2008-06-04 19:47:51 +00002092 ImpCastExprToType(lex, Context.VoidTy);
2093 ImpCastExprToType(rex, Context.VoidTy);
2094 return Context.VoidTy;
Steve Naroff95cb3892008-05-12 21:44:38 +00002095 }
Steve Naroff12ebf272008-01-08 01:11:38 +00002096 // C99 6.5.15p6 - "if one operand is a null pointer constant, the result has
2097 // the type of the other operand."
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002098 if ((lexT->isPointerType() || lexT->isBlockPointerType() ||
2099 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(lexT)) &&
Anders Carlssonf8aa8702008-12-01 06:28:23 +00002100 rex->isNullPointerConstant(Context)) {
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002101 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lexT); // promote the null to a pointer.
Steve Naroff12ebf272008-01-08 01:11:38 +00002102 return lexT;
2103 }
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002104 if ((rexT->isPointerType() || rexT->isBlockPointerType() ||
2105 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(rexT)) &&
Anders Carlssonf8aa8702008-12-01 06:28:23 +00002106 lex->isNullPointerConstant(Context)) {
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002107 ImpCastExprToType(lex, rexT); // promote the null to a pointer.
Steve Naroff12ebf272008-01-08 01:11:38 +00002108 return rexT;
2109 }
Chris Lattner0ac51632008-01-06 22:50:31 +00002110 // Handle the case where both operands are pointers before we handle null
2111 // pointer constants in case both operands are null pointer constants.
Chris Lattner71225142007-07-31 21:27:01 +00002112 if (const PointerType *LHSPT = lexT->getAsPointerType()) { // C99 6.5.15p3,6
2113 if (const PointerType *RHSPT = rexT->getAsPointerType()) {
2114 // get the "pointed to" types
2115 QualType lhptee = LHSPT->getPointeeType();
2116 QualType rhptee = RHSPT->getPointeeType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002117
Chris Lattner71225142007-07-31 21:27:01 +00002118 // ignore qualifiers on void (C99 6.5.15p3, clause 6)
2119 if (lhptee->isVoidType() &&
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002120 rhptee->isIncompleteOrObjectType()) {
Chris Lattner35fef522008-02-20 20:55:12 +00002121 // Figure out necessary qualifiers (C99 6.5.15p6)
2122 QualType destPointee=lhptee.getQualifiedType(rhptee.getCVRQualifiers());
Eli Friedmanca07c902008-02-10 22:59:36 +00002123 QualType destType = Context.getPointerType(destPointee);
2124 ImpCastExprToType(lex, destType); // add qualifiers if necessary
2125 ImpCastExprToType(rex, destType); // promote to void*
2126 return destType;
2127 }
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002128 if (rhptee->isVoidType() && lhptee->isIncompleteOrObjectType()) {
Chris Lattner35fef522008-02-20 20:55:12 +00002129 QualType destPointee=rhptee.getQualifiedType(lhptee.getCVRQualifiers());
Eli Friedmanca07c902008-02-10 22:59:36 +00002130 QualType destType = Context.getPointerType(destPointee);
2131 ImpCastExprToType(lex, destType); // add qualifiers if necessary
2132 ImpCastExprToType(rex, destType); // promote to void*
2133 return destType;
2134 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002135
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002136 QualType compositeType = lexT;
2137
2138 // If either type is an Objective-C object type then check
2139 // compatibility according to Objective-C.
2140 if (Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(lexT) ||
2141 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(rexT)) {
2142 // If both operands are interfaces and either operand can be
2143 // assigned to the other, use that type as the composite
2144 // type. This allows
2145 // xxx ? (A*) a : (B*) b
2146 // where B is a subclass of A.
2147 //
2148 // Additionally, as for assignment, if either type is 'id'
2149 // allow silent coercion. Finally, if the types are
2150 // incompatible then make sure to use 'id' as the composite
2151 // type so the result is acceptable for sending messages to.
2152
2153 // FIXME: This code should not be localized to here. Also this
2154 // should use a compatible check instead of abusing the
2155 // canAssignObjCInterfaces code.
2156 const ObjCInterfaceType* LHSIface = lhptee->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2157 const ObjCInterfaceType* RHSIface = rhptee->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2158 if (LHSIface && RHSIface &&
2159 Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface)) {
2160 compositeType = lexT;
2161 } else if (LHSIface && RHSIface &&
Douglas Gregor5183f9e2008-11-26 06:43:45 +00002162 Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSIface, LHSIface)) {
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002163 compositeType = rexT;
2164 } else if (Context.isObjCIdType(lhptee) ||
2165 Context.isObjCIdType(rhptee)) {
2166 // FIXME: This code looks wrong, because isObjCIdType checks
2167 // the struct but getObjCIdType returns the pointer to
2168 // struct. This is horrible and should be fixed.
2169 compositeType = Context.getObjCIdType();
2170 } else {
2171 QualType incompatTy = Context.getObjCIdType();
2172 ImpCastExprToType(lex, incompatTy);
2173 ImpCastExprToType(rex, incompatTy);
2174 return incompatTy;
2175 }
2176 } else if (!Context.typesAreCompatible(lhptee.getUnqualifiedType(),
2177 rhptee.getUnqualifiedType())) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002178 Diag(questionLoc, diag::warn_typecheck_cond_incompatible_pointers)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002179 << lexT << rexT << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002180 // In this situation, we assume void* type. No especially good
2181 // reason, but this is what gcc does, and we do have to pick
2182 // to get a consistent AST.
2183 QualType incompatTy = Context.getPointerType(Context.VoidTy);
Daniel Dunbarcd23bb22008-08-26 00:41:39 +00002184 ImpCastExprToType(lex, incompatTy);
2185 ImpCastExprToType(rex, incompatTy);
2186 return incompatTy;
Chris Lattner71225142007-07-31 21:27:01 +00002187 }
2188 // The pointer types are compatible.
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00002189 // C99 6.5.15p6: If both operands are pointers to compatible types *or* to
2190 // differently qualified versions of compatible types, the result type is
2191 // a pointer to an appropriately qualified version of the *composite*
2192 // type.
Eli Friedmane38150e2008-05-16 20:37:07 +00002193 // FIXME: Need to calculate the composite type.
Eli Friedmanca07c902008-02-10 22:59:36 +00002194 // FIXME: Need to add qualifiers
Eli Friedmane38150e2008-05-16 20:37:07 +00002195 ImpCastExprToType(lex, compositeType);
2196 ImpCastExprToType(rex, compositeType);
2197 return compositeType;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002198 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002199 }
Daniel Dunbara7b5fb92008-09-11 23:12:46 +00002200 // Need to handle "id<xx>" explicitly. Unlike "id", whose canonical type
2201 // evaluates to "struct objc_object *" (and is handled above when comparing
2202 // id with statically typed objects).
2203 if (lexT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || rexT->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
2204 // GCC allows qualified id and any Objective-C type to devolve to
2205 // id. Currently localizing to here until clear this should be
2206 // part of ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible.
2207 if (ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lexT, rexT, true) ||
2208 (lexT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() &&
2209 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(rexT)) ||
2210 (rexT->isObjCQualifiedIdType() &&
2211 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(lexT))) {
2212 // FIXME: This is not the correct composite type. This only
2213 // happens to work because id can more or less be used anywhere,
2214 // however this may change the type of method sends.
2215 // FIXME: gcc adds some type-checking of the arguments and emits
2216 // (confusing) incompatible comparison warnings in some
2217 // cases. Investigate.
2218 QualType compositeType = Context.getObjCIdType();
2219 ImpCastExprToType(lex, compositeType);
2220 ImpCastExprToType(rex, compositeType);
2221 return compositeType;
2222 }
2223 }
2224
Steve Naroff3eac7692008-09-10 19:17:48 +00002225 // Selection between block pointer types is ok as long as they are the same.
2226 if (lexT->isBlockPointerType() && rexT->isBlockPointerType() &&
2227 Context.getCanonicalType(lexT) == Context.getCanonicalType(rexT))
2228 return lexT;
2229
Chris Lattner992ae932008-01-06 22:42:25 +00002230 // Otherwise, the operands are not compatible.
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002231 Diag(questionLoc, diag::err_typecheck_cond_incompatible_operands)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002232 << lexT << rexT << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002233 return QualType();
2234}
2235
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +00002236/// ActOnConditionalOp - Parse a ?: operation. Note that 'LHS' may be null
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002237/// in the case of a the GNU conditional expr extension.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002238Action::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnConditionalOp(SourceLocation QuestionLoc,
2239 SourceLocation ColonLoc,
2240 ExprArg Cond, ExprArg LHS,
2241 ExprArg RHS) {
2242 Expr *CondExpr = (Expr *) Cond.get();
2243 Expr *LHSExpr = (Expr *) LHS.get(), *RHSExpr = (Expr *) RHS.get();
Chris Lattner98a425c2007-11-26 01:40:58 +00002244
2245 // If this is the gnu "x ?: y" extension, analyze the types as though the LHS
2246 // was the condition.
2247 bool isLHSNull = LHSExpr == 0;
2248 if (isLHSNull)
2249 LHSExpr = CondExpr;
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002250
2251 QualType result = CheckConditionalOperands(CondExpr, LHSExpr,
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002252 RHSExpr, QuestionLoc);
2253 if (result.isNull())
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00002254 return ExprError();
2255
2256 Cond.release();
2257 LHS.release();
2258 RHS.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00002259 return Owned(new (Context) ConditionalOperator(CondExpr,
2260 isLHSNull ? 0 : LHSExpr,
2261 RHSExpr, result));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002262}
2263
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002264
2265// CheckPointerTypesForAssignment - This is a very tricky routine (despite
2266// being closely modeled after the C99 spec:-). The odd characteristic of this
2267// routine is it effectively iqnores the qualifiers on the top level pointee.
2268// This circumvents the usual type rules specified in 6.2.7p1 & 6.7.5.[1-3].
2269// FIXME: add a couple examples in this comment.
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002270Sema::AssignConvertType
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002271Sema::CheckPointerTypesForAssignment(QualType lhsType, QualType rhsType) {
2272 QualType lhptee, rhptee;
2273
2274 // get the "pointed to" type (ignoring qualifiers at the top level)
Chris Lattner71225142007-07-31 21:27:01 +00002275 lhptee = lhsType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType();
2276 rhptee = rhsType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002277
2278 // make sure we operate on the canonical type
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00002279 lhptee = Context.getCanonicalType(lhptee);
2280 rhptee = Context.getCanonicalType(rhptee);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002281
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002282 AssignConvertType ConvTy = Compatible;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002283
2284 // C99 6.5.16.1p1: This following citation is common to constraints
2285 // 3 & 4 (below). ...and the type *pointed to* by the left has all the
2286 // qualifiers of the type *pointed to* by the right;
Chris Lattner35fef522008-02-20 20:55:12 +00002287 // FIXME: Handle ASQualType
Douglas Gregor6573cfd2008-10-21 23:43:52 +00002288 if (!lhptee.isAtLeastAsQualifiedAs(rhptee))
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002289 ConvTy = CompatiblePointerDiscardsQualifiers;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002290
2291 // C99 6.5.16.1p1 (constraint 4): If one operand is a pointer to an object or
2292 // incomplete type and the other is a pointer to a qualified or unqualified
2293 // version of void...
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002294 if (lhptee->isVoidType()) {
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002295 if (rhptee->isIncompleteOrObjectType())
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002296 return ConvTy;
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002297
2298 // As an extension, we allow cast to/from void* to function pointer.
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002299 assert(rhptee->isFunctionType());
2300 return FunctionVoidPointer;
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002301 }
2302
2303 if (rhptee->isVoidType()) {
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002304 if (lhptee->isIncompleteOrObjectType())
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002305 return ConvTy;
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002306
2307 // As an extension, we allow cast to/from void* to function pointer.
Chris Lattner9db553e2008-04-02 06:59:01 +00002308 assert(lhptee->isFunctionType());
2309 return FunctionVoidPointer;
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002310 }
Eli Friedman0d9549b2008-08-22 00:56:42 +00002311
2312 // Check for ObjC interfaces
2313 const ObjCInterfaceType* LHSIface = lhptee->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2314 const ObjCInterfaceType* RHSIface = rhptee->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2315 if (LHSIface && RHSIface &&
2316 Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface))
2317 return ConvTy;
2318
2319 // ID acts sort of like void* for ObjC interfaces
2320 if (LHSIface && Context.isObjCIdType(rhptee))
2321 return ConvTy;
2322 if (RHSIface && Context.isObjCIdType(lhptee))
2323 return ConvTy;
2324
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002325 // C99 6.5.16.1p1 (constraint 3): both operands are pointers to qualified or
2326 // unqualified versions of compatible types, ...
Chris Lattner4ca3d772008-01-03 22:56:36 +00002327 if (!Context.typesAreCompatible(lhptee.getUnqualifiedType(),
2328 rhptee.getUnqualifiedType()))
2329 return IncompatiblePointer; // this "trumps" PointerAssignDiscardsQualifiers
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002330 return ConvTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002331}
2332
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002333/// CheckBlockPointerTypesForAssignment - This routine determines whether two
2334/// block pointer types are compatible or whether a block and normal pointer
2335/// are compatible. It is more restrict than comparing two function pointer
2336// types.
2337Sema::AssignConvertType
2338Sema::CheckBlockPointerTypesForAssignment(QualType lhsType,
2339 QualType rhsType) {
2340 QualType lhptee, rhptee;
2341
2342 // get the "pointed to" type (ignoring qualifiers at the top level)
2343 lhptee = lhsType->getAsBlockPointerType()->getPointeeType();
2344 rhptee = rhsType->getAsBlockPointerType()->getPointeeType();
2345
2346 // make sure we operate on the canonical type
2347 lhptee = Context.getCanonicalType(lhptee);
2348 rhptee = Context.getCanonicalType(rhptee);
2349
2350 AssignConvertType ConvTy = Compatible;
2351
2352 // For blocks we enforce that qualifiers are identical.
2353 if (lhptee.getCVRQualifiers() != rhptee.getCVRQualifiers())
2354 ConvTy = CompatiblePointerDiscardsQualifiers;
2355
2356 if (!Context.typesAreBlockCompatible(lhptee, rhptee))
2357 return IncompatibleBlockPointer;
2358 return ConvTy;
2359}
2360
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002361/// CheckAssignmentConstraints (C99 6.5.16) - This routine currently
2362/// has code to accommodate several GCC extensions when type checking
2363/// pointers. Here are some objectionable examples that GCC considers warnings:
2364///
2365/// int a, *pint;
2366/// short *pshort;
2367/// struct foo *pfoo;
2368///
2369/// pint = pshort; // warning: assignment from incompatible pointer type
2370/// a = pint; // warning: assignment makes integer from pointer without a cast
2371/// pint = a; // warning: assignment makes pointer from integer without a cast
2372/// pint = pfoo; // warning: assignment from incompatible pointer type
2373///
2374/// As a result, the code for dealing with pointers is more complex than the
2375/// C99 spec dictates.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002376///
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002377Sema::AssignConvertType
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002378Sema::CheckAssignmentConstraints(QualType lhsType, QualType rhsType) {
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002379 // Get canonical types. We're not formatting these types, just comparing
2380 // them.
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00002381 lhsType = Context.getCanonicalType(lhsType).getUnqualifiedType();
2382 rhsType = Context.getCanonicalType(rhsType).getUnqualifiedType();
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002383
2384 if (lhsType == rhsType)
Chris Lattnerfdd96d72008-01-07 17:51:46 +00002385 return Compatible; // Common case: fast path an exact match.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002386
Douglas Gregor0d5d89d2008-10-28 00:22:11 +00002387 // If the left-hand side is a reference type, then we are in a
2388 // (rare!) case where we've allowed the use of references in C,
2389 // e.g., as a parameter type in a built-in function. In this case,
2390 // just make sure that the type referenced is compatible with the
2391 // right-hand side type. The caller is responsible for adjusting
2392 // lhsType so that the resulting expression does not have reference
2393 // type.
2394 if (const ReferenceType *lhsTypeRef = lhsType->getAsReferenceType()) {
2395 if (Context.typesAreCompatible(lhsTypeRef->getPointeeType(), rhsType))
Anders Carlssoncebb8d62007-10-12 23:56:29 +00002396 return Compatible;
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002397 return Incompatible;
Fariborz Jahanian957442d2007-12-19 17:45:58 +00002398 }
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002399
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002400 if (lhsType->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || rhsType->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) {
2401 if (ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lhsType, rhsType, false))
Fariborz Jahanian957442d2007-12-19 17:45:58 +00002402 return Compatible;
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002403 // Relax integer conversions like we do for pointers below.
2404 if (rhsType->isIntegerType())
2405 return IntToPointer;
2406 if (lhsType->isIntegerType())
2407 return PointerToInt;
Steve Naroff19608432008-10-14 22:18:38 +00002408 return IncompatibleObjCQualifiedId;
Fariborz Jahanian957442d2007-12-19 17:45:58 +00002409 }
Chris Lattnerdb22bf42008-01-04 23:32:24 +00002410
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002411 if (lhsType->isVectorType() || rhsType->isVectorType()) {
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00002412 // For ExtVector, allow vector splats; float -> <n x float>
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002413 if (const ExtVectorType *LV = lhsType->getAsExtVectorType())
2414 if (LV->getElementType() == rhsType)
Chris Lattnerdb22bf42008-01-04 23:32:24 +00002415 return Compatible;
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002416
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002417 // If we are allowing lax vector conversions, and LHS and RHS are both
2418 // vectors, the total size only needs to be the same. This is a bitcast;
2419 // no bits are changed but the result type is different.
Chris Lattnerdb22bf42008-01-04 23:32:24 +00002420 if (getLangOptions().LaxVectorConversions &&
2421 lhsType->isVectorType() && rhsType->isVectorType()) {
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002422 if (Context.getTypeSize(lhsType) == Context.getTypeSize(rhsType))
2423 return Compatible;
Chris Lattnerdb22bf42008-01-04 23:32:24 +00002424 }
2425 return Incompatible;
2426 }
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002427
Chris Lattnerdb22bf42008-01-04 23:32:24 +00002428 if (lhsType->isArithmeticType() && rhsType->isArithmeticType())
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002429 return Compatible;
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002430
Chris Lattner390564e2008-04-07 06:49:41 +00002431 if (isa<PointerType>(lhsType)) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002432 if (rhsType->isIntegerType())
Chris Lattnerd951b7b2008-01-04 18:22:42 +00002433 return IntToPointer;
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002434
Chris Lattner390564e2008-04-07 06:49:41 +00002435 if (isa<PointerType>(rhsType))
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002436 return CheckPointerTypesForAssignment(lhsType, rhsType);
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002437
Steve Naroffa982c712008-09-29 18:10:17 +00002438 if (rhsType->getAsBlockPointerType()) {
Steve Naroffd6163f32008-09-05 22:11:13 +00002439 if (lhsType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType()->isVoidType())
Douglas Gregor7abc1432008-11-27 00:44:28 +00002440 return Compatible;
Steve Naroffa982c712008-09-29 18:10:17 +00002441
2442 // Treat block pointers as objects.
2443 if (getLangOptions().ObjC1 &&
2444 lhsType == Context.getCanonicalType(Context.getObjCIdType()))
2445 return Compatible;
2446 }
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002447 return Incompatible;
2448 }
2449
2450 if (isa<BlockPointerType>(lhsType)) {
2451 if (rhsType->isIntegerType())
2452 return IntToPointer;
2453
Steve Naroffa982c712008-09-29 18:10:17 +00002454 // Treat block pointers as objects.
2455 if (getLangOptions().ObjC1 &&
2456 rhsType == Context.getCanonicalType(Context.getObjCIdType()))
2457 return Compatible;
2458
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002459 if (rhsType->isBlockPointerType())
2460 return CheckBlockPointerTypesForAssignment(lhsType, rhsType);
2461
2462 if (const PointerType *RHSPT = rhsType->getAsPointerType()) {
2463 if (RHSPT->getPointeeType()->isVoidType())
Douglas Gregor7abc1432008-11-27 00:44:28 +00002464 return Compatible;
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002465 }
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002466 return Incompatible;
2467 }
2468
Chris Lattner390564e2008-04-07 06:49:41 +00002469 if (isa<PointerType>(rhsType)) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002470 // C99 6.5.16.1p1: the left operand is _Bool and the right is a pointer.
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002471 if (lhsType == Context.BoolTy)
2472 return Compatible;
2473
2474 if (lhsType->isIntegerType())
Chris Lattnerd951b7b2008-01-04 18:22:42 +00002475 return PointerToInt;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002476
Chris Lattner390564e2008-04-07 06:49:41 +00002477 if (isa<PointerType>(lhsType))
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002478 return CheckPointerTypesForAssignment(lhsType, rhsType);
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002479
2480 if (isa<BlockPointerType>(lhsType) &&
2481 rhsType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType()->isVoidType())
Douglas Gregor7abc1432008-11-27 00:44:28 +00002482 return Compatible;
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002483 return Incompatible;
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002484 }
Eli Friedman48d0bb02008-05-30 18:07:22 +00002485
Chris Lattner1853da22008-01-04 23:18:45 +00002486 if (isa<TagType>(lhsType) && isa<TagType>(rhsType)) {
Chris Lattner390564e2008-04-07 06:49:41 +00002487 if (Context.typesAreCompatible(lhsType, rhsType))
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002488 return Compatible;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002489 }
2490 return Incompatible;
2491}
2492
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002493Sema::AssignConvertType
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002494Sema::CheckSingleAssignmentConstraints(QualType lhsType, Expr *&rExpr) {
Douglas Gregor6573cfd2008-10-21 23:43:52 +00002495 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
2496 if (!lhsType->isRecordType()) {
2497 // C++ 5.17p3: If the left operand is not of class type, the
2498 // expression is implicitly converted (C++ 4) to the
2499 // cv-unqualified type of the left operand.
Douglas Gregor6fd35572008-12-19 17:40:08 +00002500 if (PerformImplicitConversion(rExpr, lhsType.getUnqualifiedType(),
2501 "assigning"))
Douglas Gregor6573cfd2008-10-21 23:43:52 +00002502 return Incompatible;
Douglas Gregorbb461502008-10-24 04:54:22 +00002503 else
Douglas Gregor6573cfd2008-10-21 23:43:52 +00002504 return Compatible;
Douglas Gregor6573cfd2008-10-21 23:43:52 +00002505 }
2506
2507 // FIXME: Currently, we fall through and treat C++ classes like C
2508 // structures.
2509 }
2510
Steve Naroffcdee22d2007-11-27 17:58:44 +00002511 // C99 6.5.16.1p1: the left operand is a pointer and the right is
2512 // a null pointer constant.
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002513 if ((lhsType->isPointerType() || lhsType->isObjCQualifiedIdType() ||
2514 lhsType->isBlockPointerType())
Fariborz Jahaniana13effb2008-01-03 18:46:52 +00002515 && rExpr->isNullPointerConstant(Context)) {
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002516 ImpCastExprToType(rExpr, lhsType);
Steve Naroffcdee22d2007-11-27 17:58:44 +00002517 return Compatible;
2518 }
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002519
2520 // We don't allow conversion of non-null-pointer constants to integers.
2521 if (lhsType->isBlockPointerType() && rExpr->getType()->isIntegerType())
2522 return IntToBlockPointer;
2523
Chris Lattner5f505bf2007-10-16 02:55:40 +00002524 // This check seems unnatural, however it is necessary to ensure the proper
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002525 // conversion of functions/arrays. If the conversion were done for all
Steve Naroff0acc9c92007-09-15 18:49:24 +00002526 // DeclExpr's (created by ActOnIdentifierExpr), it would mess up the unary
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002527 // expressions that surpress this implicit conversion (&, sizeof).
Chris Lattner5f505bf2007-10-16 02:55:40 +00002528 //
Douglas Gregor0d5d89d2008-10-28 00:22:11 +00002529 // Suppress this for references: C++ 8.5.3p5.
Chris Lattner5f505bf2007-10-16 02:55:40 +00002530 if (!lhsType->isReferenceType())
2531 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(rExpr);
Steve Naroff0f32f432007-08-24 22:33:52 +00002532
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002533 Sema::AssignConvertType result =
2534 CheckAssignmentConstraints(lhsType, rExpr->getType());
Steve Naroff0f32f432007-08-24 22:33:52 +00002535
2536 // C99 6.5.16.1p2: The value of the right operand is converted to the
2537 // type of the assignment expression.
Douglas Gregor0d5d89d2008-10-28 00:22:11 +00002538 // CheckAssignmentConstraints allows the left-hand side to be a reference,
2539 // so that we can use references in built-in functions even in C.
2540 // The getNonReferenceType() call makes sure that the resulting expression
2541 // does not have reference type.
Steve Naroff0f32f432007-08-24 22:33:52 +00002542 if (rExpr->getType() != lhsType)
Douglas Gregor0d5d89d2008-10-28 00:22:11 +00002543 ImpCastExprToType(rExpr, lhsType.getNonReferenceType());
Steve Naroff0f32f432007-08-24 22:33:52 +00002544 return result;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002545}
2546
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00002547Sema::AssignConvertType
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002548Sema::CheckCompoundAssignmentConstraints(QualType lhsType, QualType rhsType) {
2549 return CheckAssignmentConstraints(lhsType, rhsType);
2550}
2551
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002552QualType Sema::InvalidOperands(SourceLocation Loc, Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002553 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_invalid_operands)
Chris Lattnerda5c0872008-11-23 09:13:29 +00002554 << lex->getType() << rex->getType()
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002555 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner2c8bff72007-12-12 05:47:28 +00002556 return QualType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002557}
2558
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002559inline QualType Sema::CheckVectorOperands(SourceLocation Loc, Expr *&lex,
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002560 Expr *&rex) {
Nate Begeman03105572008-04-04 01:30:25 +00002561 // For conversion purposes, we ignore any qualifiers.
2562 // For example, "const float" and "float" are equivalent.
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00002563 QualType lhsType =
2564 Context.getCanonicalType(lex->getType()).getUnqualifiedType();
2565 QualType rhsType =
2566 Context.getCanonicalType(rex->getType()).getUnqualifiedType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002567
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002568 // If the vector types are identical, return.
Nate Begeman03105572008-04-04 01:30:25 +00002569 if (lhsType == rhsType)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002570 return lhsType;
Nate Begemanec2d1062007-12-30 02:59:45 +00002571
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002572 // Handle the case of a vector & extvector type of the same size and element
2573 // type. It would be nice if we only had one vector type someday.
2574 if (getLangOptions().LaxVectorConversions)
2575 if (const VectorType *LV = lhsType->getAsVectorType())
2576 if (const VectorType *RV = rhsType->getAsVectorType())
2577 if (LV->getElementType() == RV->getElementType() &&
2578 LV->getNumElements() == RV->getNumElements())
2579 return lhsType->isExtVectorType() ? lhsType : rhsType;
2580
2581 // If the lhs is an extended vector and the rhs is a scalar of the same type
2582 // or a literal, promote the rhs to the vector type.
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00002583 if (const ExtVectorType *V = lhsType->getAsExtVectorType()) {
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002584 QualType eltType = V->getElementType();
2585
2586 if ((eltType->getAsBuiltinType() == rhsType->getAsBuiltinType()) ||
2587 (eltType->isIntegerType() && isa<IntegerLiteral>(rex)) ||
2588 (eltType->isFloatingType() && isa<FloatingLiteral>(rex))) {
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002589 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lhsType);
Nate Begemanec2d1062007-12-30 02:59:45 +00002590 return lhsType;
2591 }
2592 }
2593
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002594 // If the rhs is an extended vector and the lhs is a scalar of the same type,
Nate Begemanec2d1062007-12-30 02:59:45 +00002595 // promote the lhs to the vector type.
Nate Begemanaf6ed502008-04-18 23:10:10 +00002596 if (const ExtVectorType *V = rhsType->getAsExtVectorType()) {
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002597 QualType eltType = V->getElementType();
2598
2599 if ((eltType->getAsBuiltinType() == lhsType->getAsBuiltinType()) ||
2600 (eltType->isIntegerType() && isa<IntegerLiteral>(lex)) ||
2601 (eltType->isFloatingType() && isa<FloatingLiteral>(lex))) {
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002602 ImpCastExprToType(lex, rhsType);
Nate Begemanec2d1062007-12-30 02:59:45 +00002603 return rhsType;
2604 }
2605 }
2606
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002607 // You cannot convert between vector values of different size.
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002608 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_vector_not_convertable)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002609 << lex->getType() << rex->getType()
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002610 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002611 return QualType();
2612}
2613
2614inline QualType Sema::CheckMultiplyDivideOperands(
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002615 Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc, bool isCompAssign)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002616{
Daniel Dunbar2f08d812009-01-05 22:42:10 +00002617 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002618 return CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002619
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002620 QualType compType = UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex, isCompAssign);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002621
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002622 if (lex->getType()->isArithmeticType() && rex->getType()->isArithmeticType())
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002623 return compType;
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002624 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002625}
2626
2627inline QualType Sema::CheckRemainderOperands(
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002628 Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc, bool isCompAssign)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002629{
Daniel Dunbarb27282f2009-01-05 22:55:36 +00002630 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType()) {
2631 if (lex->getType()->isIntegerType() && rex->getType()->isIntegerType())
2632 return CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
2633 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
2634 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002635
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002636 QualType compType = UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex, isCompAssign);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002637
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002638 if (lex->getType()->isIntegerType() && rex->getType()->isIntegerType())
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002639 return compType;
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002640 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002641}
2642
2643inline QualType Sema::CheckAdditionOperands( // C99 6.5.6
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002644 Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc, bool isCompAssign)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002645{
2646 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002647 return CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002648
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002649 QualType compType = UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex, isCompAssign);
Eli Friedmand9b1fec2008-05-18 18:08:51 +00002650
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002651 // handle the common case first (both operands are arithmetic).
2652 if (lex->getType()->isArithmeticType() && rex->getType()->isArithmeticType())
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002653 return compType;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002654
Eli Friedmand9b1fec2008-05-18 18:08:51 +00002655 // Put any potential pointer into PExp
2656 Expr* PExp = lex, *IExp = rex;
2657 if (IExp->getType()->isPointerType())
2658 std::swap(PExp, IExp);
2659
2660 if (const PointerType* PTy = PExp->getType()->getAsPointerType()) {
2661 if (IExp->getType()->isIntegerType()) {
2662 // Check for arithmetic on pointers to incomplete types
2663 if (!PTy->getPointeeType()->isObjectType()) {
2664 if (PTy->getPointeeType()->isVoidType()) {
Douglas Gregorb3193242009-01-23 00:36:41 +00002665 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
2666 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_void_type)
2667 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
2668 return QualType();
2669 }
2670
2671 // GNU extension: arithmetic on pointer to void
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002672 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_void_ptr)
2673 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00002674 } else if (PTy->getPointeeType()->isFunctionType()) {
Douglas Gregorb3193242009-01-23 00:36:41 +00002675 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
2676 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_function_type)
2677 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
2678 return QualType();
2679 }
2680
2681 // GNU extension: arithmetic on pointer to function
2682 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_ptr_func_arith)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002683 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00002684 } else {
2685 DiagnoseIncompleteType(Loc, PTy->getPointeeType(),
2686 diag::err_typecheck_arithmetic_incomplete_type,
2687 lex->getSourceRange(), SourceRange(),
2688 lex->getType());
2689 return QualType();
Eli Friedmand9b1fec2008-05-18 18:08:51 +00002690 }
2691 }
2692 return PExp->getType();
2693 }
2694 }
2695
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002696 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002697}
2698
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002699// C99 6.5.6
2700QualType Sema::CheckSubtractionOperands(Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex,
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002701 SourceLocation Loc, bool isCompAssign) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002702 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002703 return CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002704
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002705 QualType compType = UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex, isCompAssign);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002706
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002707 // Enforce type constraints: C99 6.5.6p3.
2708
2709 // Handle the common case first (both operands are arithmetic).
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002710 if (lex->getType()->isArithmeticType() && rex->getType()->isArithmeticType())
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00002711 return compType;
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002712
2713 // Either ptr - int or ptr - ptr.
2714 if (const PointerType *LHSPTy = lex->getType()->getAsPointerType()) {
Steve Naroff577f9722008-01-29 18:58:14 +00002715 QualType lpointee = LHSPTy->getPointeeType();
Eli Friedman50727042008-02-08 01:19:44 +00002716
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002717 // The LHS must be an object type, not incomplete, function, etc.
Steve Naroff577f9722008-01-29 18:58:14 +00002718 if (!lpointee->isObjectType()) {
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002719 // Handle the GNU void* extension.
Steve Naroff577f9722008-01-29 18:58:14 +00002720 if (lpointee->isVoidType()) {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002721 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_void_ptr)
2722 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregorb3193242009-01-23 00:36:41 +00002723 } else if (lpointee->isFunctionType()) {
2724 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
2725 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_function_type)
2726 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
2727 return QualType();
2728 }
2729
2730 // GNU extension: arithmetic on pointer to function
2731 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_ptr_func_arith)
2732 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002733 } else {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002734 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_sub_ptr_object)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002735 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002736 return QualType();
2737 }
2738 }
2739
2740 // The result type of a pointer-int computation is the pointer type.
2741 if (rex->getType()->isIntegerType())
2742 return lex->getType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002743
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002744 // Handle pointer-pointer subtractions.
2745 if (const PointerType *RHSPTy = rex->getType()->getAsPointerType()) {
Eli Friedman50727042008-02-08 01:19:44 +00002746 QualType rpointee = RHSPTy->getPointeeType();
2747
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002748 // RHS must be an object type, unless void (GNU).
Steve Naroff577f9722008-01-29 18:58:14 +00002749 if (!rpointee->isObjectType()) {
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002750 // Handle the GNU void* extension.
Steve Naroff577f9722008-01-29 18:58:14 +00002751 if (rpointee->isVoidType()) {
2752 if (!lpointee->isVoidType())
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002753 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_void_ptr)
2754 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregorf93eda12009-01-23 19:03:35 +00002755 } else if (rpointee->isFunctionType()) {
2756 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
2757 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_function_type)
2758 << rex->getType() << rex->getSourceRange();
2759 return QualType();
2760 }
2761
2762 // GNU extension: arithmetic on pointer to function
2763 if (!lpointee->isFunctionType())
2764 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_gnu_ptr_func_arith)
2765 << lex->getType() << lex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002766 } else {
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00002767 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_sub_ptr_object)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002768 << rex->getType() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002769 return QualType();
2770 }
2771 }
2772
2773 // Pointee types must be compatible.
Eli Friedman583c31e2008-09-02 05:09:35 +00002774 if (!Context.typesAreCompatible(
2775 Context.getCanonicalType(lpointee).getUnqualifiedType(),
2776 Context.getCanonicalType(rpointee).getUnqualifiedType())) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002777 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_sub_ptr_compatible)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002778 << lex->getType() << rex->getType()
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002779 << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerf6da2912007-12-09 21:53:25 +00002780 return QualType();
2781 }
2782
2783 return Context.getPointerDiffType();
2784 }
2785 }
2786
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002787 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002788}
2789
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002790// C99 6.5.7
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002791QualType Sema::CheckShiftOperands(Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc,
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002792 bool isCompAssign) {
Chris Lattner2c8bff72007-12-12 05:47:28 +00002793 // C99 6.5.7p2: Each of the operands shall have integer type.
2794 if (!lex->getType()->isIntegerType() || !rex->getType()->isIntegerType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002795 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002796
Chris Lattner2c8bff72007-12-12 05:47:28 +00002797 // Shifts don't perform usual arithmetic conversions, they just do integer
2798 // promotions on each operand. C99 6.5.7p3
Chris Lattnerbb19bc42007-12-13 07:28:16 +00002799 if (!isCompAssign)
2800 UsualUnaryConversions(lex);
Chris Lattner2c8bff72007-12-12 05:47:28 +00002801 UsualUnaryConversions(rex);
2802
2803 // "The type of the result is that of the promoted left operand."
2804 return lex->getType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002805}
2806
Eli Friedman0d9549b2008-08-22 00:56:42 +00002807static bool areComparableObjCInterfaces(QualType LHS, QualType RHS,
2808 ASTContext& Context) {
2809 const ObjCInterfaceType* LHSIface = LHS->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2810 const ObjCInterfaceType* RHSIface = RHS->getAsObjCInterfaceType();
2811 // ID acts sort of like void* for ObjC interfaces
2812 if (LHSIface && Context.isObjCIdType(RHS))
2813 return true;
2814 if (RHSIface && Context.isObjCIdType(LHS))
2815 return true;
2816 if (!LHSIface || !RHSIface)
2817 return false;
2818 return Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(LHSIface, RHSIface) ||
2819 Context.canAssignObjCInterfaces(RHSIface, LHSIface);
2820}
2821
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002822// C99 6.5.8
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002823QualType Sema::CheckCompareOperands(Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc,
Chris Lattnerfe1f4032008-04-07 05:30:13 +00002824 bool isRelational) {
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002825 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002826 return CheckVectorCompareOperands(lex, rex, Loc, isRelational);
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002827
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002828 // C99 6.5.8p3 / C99 6.5.9p4
Steve Naroffecc4fa12007-08-10 18:26:40 +00002829 if (lex->getType()->isArithmeticType() && rex->getType()->isArithmeticType())
2830 UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex);
2831 else {
2832 UsualUnaryConversions(lex);
2833 UsualUnaryConversions(rex);
2834 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002835 QualType lType = lex->getType();
2836 QualType rType = rex->getType();
2837
Ted Kremenek486509e2007-10-29 17:13:39 +00002838 // For non-floating point types, check for self-comparisons of the form
2839 // x == x, x != x, x < x, etc. These always evaluate to a constant, and
2840 // often indicate logic errors in the program.
Ted Kremenekcf8b77d2007-10-29 16:58:49 +00002841 if (!lType->isFloatingType()) {
Ted Kremenek87e30c52008-01-17 16:57:34 +00002842 if (DeclRefExpr* DRL = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(lex->IgnoreParens()))
2843 if (DeclRefExpr* DRR = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(rex->IgnoreParens()))
Ted Kremenekcf8b77d2007-10-29 16:58:49 +00002844 if (DRL->getDecl() == DRR->getDecl())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002845 Diag(Loc, diag::warn_selfcomparison);
Ted Kremenekcf8b77d2007-10-29 16:58:49 +00002846 }
2847
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002848 // The result of comparisons is 'bool' in C++, 'int' in C.
2849 QualType ResultTy = getLangOptions().CPlusPlus? Context.BoolTy : Context.IntTy;
2850
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002851 if (isRelational) {
2852 if (lType->isRealType() && rType->isRealType())
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002853 return ResultTy;
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002854 } else {
Ted Kremenek486509e2007-10-29 17:13:39 +00002855 // Check for comparisons of floating point operands using != and ==.
Ted Kremenek486509e2007-10-29 17:13:39 +00002856 if (lType->isFloatingType()) {
2857 assert (rType->isFloatingType());
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002858 CheckFloatComparison(Loc,lex,rex);
Ted Kremenek75439142007-10-29 16:40:01 +00002859 }
2860
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002861 if (lType->isArithmeticType() && rType->isArithmeticType())
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002862 return ResultTy;
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002863 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002864
Chris Lattner22be8422007-08-26 01:10:14 +00002865 bool LHSIsNull = lex->isNullPointerConstant(Context);
2866 bool RHSIsNull = rex->isNullPointerConstant(Context);
2867
Chris Lattner254f3bc2007-08-26 01:18:55 +00002868 // All of the following pointer related warnings are GCC extensions, except
2869 // when handling null pointer constants. One day, we can consider making them
2870 // errors (when -pedantic-errors is enabled).
Steve Naroffc33c0602007-08-27 04:08:11 +00002871 if (lType->isPointerType() && rType->isPointerType()) { // C99 6.5.8p2
Chris Lattner56a5cd62008-04-03 05:07:25 +00002872 QualType LCanPointeeTy =
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00002873 Context.getCanonicalType(lType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType());
Chris Lattner56a5cd62008-04-03 05:07:25 +00002874 QualType RCanPointeeTy =
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00002875 Context.getCanonicalType(rType->getAsPointerType()->getPointeeType());
Eli Friedman50727042008-02-08 01:19:44 +00002876
Steve Naroff3b435622007-11-13 14:57:38 +00002877 if (!LHSIsNull && !RHSIsNull && // C99 6.5.9p2
Chris Lattner56a5cd62008-04-03 05:07:25 +00002878 !LCanPointeeTy->isVoidType() && !RCanPointeeTy->isVoidType() &&
2879 !Context.typesAreCompatible(LCanPointeeTy.getUnqualifiedType(),
Eli Friedman0d9549b2008-08-22 00:56:42 +00002880 RCanPointeeTy.getUnqualifiedType()) &&
2881 !areComparableObjCInterfaces(LCanPointeeTy, RCanPointeeTy, Context)) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002882 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_distinct_pointers)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002883 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002884 }
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002885 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType); // promote the pointer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002886 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff4462cb02007-08-16 21:48:38 +00002887 }
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002888 // Handle block pointer types.
2889 if (lType->isBlockPointerType() && rType->isBlockPointerType()) {
2890 QualType lpointee = lType->getAsBlockPointerType()->getPointeeType();
2891 QualType rpointee = rType->getAsBlockPointerType()->getPointeeType();
2892
2893 if (!LHSIsNull && !RHSIsNull &&
2894 !Context.typesAreBlockCompatible(lpointee, rpointee)) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002895 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_comparison_of_distinct_blocks)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002896 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002897 }
2898 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType); // promote the pointer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002899 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002900 }
Steve Narofff85d66c2008-09-28 01:11:11 +00002901 // Allow block pointers to be compared with null pointer constants.
2902 if ((lType->isBlockPointerType() && rType->isPointerType()) ||
2903 (lType->isPointerType() && rType->isBlockPointerType())) {
2904 if (!LHSIsNull && !RHSIsNull) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002905 Diag(Loc, diag::err_typecheck_comparison_of_distinct_blocks)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002906 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Narofff85d66c2008-09-28 01:11:11 +00002907 }
2908 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType); // promote the pointer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002909 return ResultTy;
Steve Narofff85d66c2008-09-28 01:11:11 +00002910 }
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00002911
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002912 if ((lType->isObjCQualifiedIdType() || rType->isObjCQualifiedIdType())) {
Steve Naroff3d081ae2008-10-27 10:33:19 +00002913 if (lType->isPointerType() || rType->isPointerType()) {
Steve Naroff030fcda2008-11-17 19:49:16 +00002914 const PointerType *LPT = lType->getAsPointerType();
2915 const PointerType *RPT = rType->getAsPointerType();
2916 bool LPtrToVoid = LPT ?
2917 Context.getCanonicalType(LPT->getPointeeType())->isVoidType() : false;
2918 bool RPtrToVoid = RPT ?
2919 Context.getCanonicalType(RPT->getPointeeType())->isVoidType() : false;
2920
2921 if (!LPtrToVoid && !RPtrToVoid &&
2922 !Context.typesAreCompatible(lType, rType)) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002923 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_distinct_pointers)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002924 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff3d081ae2008-10-27 10:33:19 +00002925 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType);
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002926 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff3d081ae2008-10-27 10:33:19 +00002927 }
Daniel Dunbar11c5f822008-10-23 23:30:52 +00002928 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType);
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002929 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff3b2ceea2008-10-20 18:19:10 +00002930 }
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002931 if (ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible(lType, rType, true)) {
2932 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType);
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002933 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff19608432008-10-14 22:18:38 +00002934 } else {
2935 if ((lType->isObjCQualifiedIdType() && rType->isObjCQualifiedIdType())) {
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002936 Diag(Loc, diag::warn_incompatible_qualified_id_operands)
Chris Lattner271d4c22008-11-24 05:29:24 +00002937 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Daniel Dunbar11c5f822008-10-23 23:30:52 +00002938 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType);
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002939 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff19608432008-10-14 22:18:38 +00002940 }
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002941 }
Fariborz Jahanian5319d9c2007-12-20 01:06:58 +00002942 }
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002943 if ((lType->isPointerType() || lType->isObjCQualifiedIdType()) &&
2944 rType->isIntegerType()) {
Chris Lattner22be8422007-08-26 01:10:14 +00002945 if (!RHSIsNull)
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002946 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_pointer_integer)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002947 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002948 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType); // promote the integer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002949 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff4462cb02007-08-16 21:48:38 +00002950 }
Steve Naroff936c4362008-06-03 14:04:54 +00002951 if (lType->isIntegerType() &&
2952 (rType->isPointerType() || rType->isObjCQualifiedIdType())) {
Chris Lattner22be8422007-08-26 01:10:14 +00002953 if (!LHSIsNull)
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002954 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_pointer_integer)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002955 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnere992d6c2008-01-16 19:17:22 +00002956 ImpCastExprToType(lex, rType); // promote the integer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002957 return ResultTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002958 }
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002959 // Handle block pointers.
2960 if (lType->isBlockPointerType() && rType->isIntegerType()) {
2961 if (!RHSIsNull)
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002962 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_pointer_integer)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002963 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002964 ImpCastExprToType(rex, lType); // promote the integer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002965 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002966 }
2967 if (lType->isIntegerType() && rType->isBlockPointerType()) {
2968 if (!LHSIsNull)
Chris Lattner70b93d82008-11-18 22:52:51 +00002969 Diag(Loc, diag::ext_typecheck_comparison_of_pointer_integer)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00002970 << lType << rType << lex->getSourceRange() << rex->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002971 ImpCastExprToType(lex, rType); // promote the integer to pointer
Douglas Gregor849ea9c2008-11-19 03:25:36 +00002972 return ResultTy;
Steve Naroff4fea7b62008-09-04 16:56:14 +00002973 }
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002974 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00002975}
2976
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002977/// CheckVectorCompareOperands - vector comparisons are a clang extension that
2978/// operates on extended vector types. Instead of producing an IntTy result,
2979/// like a scalar comparison, a vector comparison produces a vector of integer
2980/// types.
2981QualType Sema::CheckVectorCompareOperands(Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex,
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002982 SourceLocation Loc,
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002983 bool isRelational) {
2984 // Check to make sure we're operating on vectors of the same type and width,
2985 // Allowing one side to be a scalar of element type.
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00002986 QualType vType = CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00002987 if (vType.isNull())
2988 return vType;
2989
2990 QualType lType = lex->getType();
2991 QualType rType = rex->getType();
2992
2993 // For non-floating point types, check for self-comparisons of the form
2994 // x == x, x != x, x < x, etc. These always evaluate to a constant, and
2995 // often indicate logic errors in the program.
2996 if (!lType->isFloatingType()) {
2997 if (DeclRefExpr* DRL = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(lex->IgnoreParens()))
2998 if (DeclRefExpr* DRR = dyn_cast<DeclRefExpr>(rex->IgnoreParens()))
2999 if (DRL->getDecl() == DRR->getDecl())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003000 Diag(Loc, diag::warn_selfcomparison);
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00003001 }
3002
3003 // Check for comparisons of floating point operands using != and ==.
3004 if (!isRelational && lType->isFloatingType()) {
3005 assert (rType->isFloatingType());
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003006 CheckFloatComparison(Loc,lex,rex);
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00003007 }
3008
3009 // Return the type for the comparison, which is the same as vector type for
3010 // integer vectors, or an integer type of identical size and number of
3011 // elements for floating point vectors.
3012 if (lType->isIntegerType())
3013 return lType;
3014
3015 const VectorType *VTy = lType->getAsVectorType();
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00003016 unsigned TypeSize = Context.getTypeSize(VTy->getElementType());
Nate Begemand6d2f772009-01-18 03:20:47 +00003017 if (TypeSize == Context.getTypeSize(Context.IntTy))
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00003018 return Context.getExtVectorType(Context.IntTy, VTy->getNumElements());
Nate Begemand6d2f772009-01-18 03:20:47 +00003019 else if (TypeSize == Context.getTypeSize(Context.LongTy))
3020 return Context.getExtVectorType(Context.LongTy, VTy->getNumElements());
3021
3022 assert(TypeSize == Context.getTypeSize(Context.LongLongTy) &&
3023 "Unhandled vector element size in vector compare");
Nate Begemanc5f0f652008-07-14 18:02:46 +00003024 return Context.getExtVectorType(Context.LongLongTy, VTy->getNumElements());
3025}
3026
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003027inline QualType Sema::CheckBitwiseOperands(
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003028 Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc, bool isCompAssign)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003029{
3030 if (lex->getType()->isVectorType() || rex->getType()->isVectorType())
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003031 return CheckVectorOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003032
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00003033 QualType compType = UsualArithmeticConversions(lex, rex, isCompAssign);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003034
3035 if (lex->getType()->isIntegerType() && rex->getType()->isIntegerType())
Steve Naroff8f708362007-08-24 19:07:16 +00003036 return compType;
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003037 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003038}
3039
3040inline QualType Sema::CheckLogicalOperands( // C99 6.5.[13,14]
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003041 Expr *&lex, Expr *&rex, SourceLocation Loc)
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003042{
3043 UsualUnaryConversions(lex);
3044 UsualUnaryConversions(rex);
3045
Eli Friedmanbea3f842008-05-13 20:16:47 +00003046 if (lex->getType()->isScalarType() && rex->getType()->isScalarType())
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003047 return Context.IntTy;
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003048 return InvalidOperands(Loc, lex, rex);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003049}
3050
Fariborz Jahanianf96ee9e2009-01-12 19:55:42 +00003051/// IsReadonlyProperty - Verify that otherwise a valid l-value expression
3052/// is a read-only property; return true if so. A readonly property expression
3053/// depends on various declarations and thus must be treated specially.
3054///
3055static bool IsReadonlyProperty(Expr *E, Sema &S)
3056{
3057 if (E->getStmtClass() == Expr::ObjCPropertyRefExprClass) {
3058 const ObjCPropertyRefExpr* PropExpr = cast<ObjCPropertyRefExpr>(E);
3059 if (ObjCPropertyDecl *PDecl = PropExpr->getProperty()) {
3060 QualType BaseType = PropExpr->getBase()->getType();
3061 if (const PointerType *PTy = BaseType->getAsPointerType())
3062 if (const ObjCInterfaceType *IFTy =
3063 PTy->getPointeeType()->getAsObjCInterfaceType())
3064 if (ObjCInterfaceDecl *IFace = IFTy->getDecl())
3065 if (S.isPropertyReadonly(PDecl, IFace))
3066 return true;
3067 }
3068 }
3069 return false;
3070}
3071
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003072/// CheckForModifiableLvalue - Verify that E is a modifiable lvalue. If not,
3073/// emit an error and return true. If so, return false.
3074static bool CheckForModifiableLvalue(Expr *E, SourceLocation Loc, Sema &S) {
Fariborz Jahanianf96ee9e2009-01-12 19:55:42 +00003075 Expr::isModifiableLvalueResult IsLV = E->isModifiableLvalue(S.Context);
3076 if (IsLV == Expr::MLV_Valid && IsReadonlyProperty(E, S))
3077 IsLV = Expr::MLV_ReadonlyProperty;
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003078 if (IsLV == Expr::MLV_Valid)
3079 return false;
3080
3081 unsigned Diag = 0;
3082 bool NeedType = false;
3083 switch (IsLV) { // C99 6.5.16p2
3084 default: assert(0 && "Unknown result from isModifiableLvalue!");
3085 case Expr::MLV_ConstQualified: Diag = diag::err_typecheck_assign_const; break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003086 case Expr::MLV_ArrayType:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003087 Diag = diag::err_typecheck_array_not_modifiable_lvalue;
3088 NeedType = true;
3089 break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003090 case Expr::MLV_NotObjectType:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003091 Diag = diag::err_typecheck_non_object_not_modifiable_lvalue;
3092 NeedType = true;
3093 break;
Chris Lattner37fb9402008-11-17 19:51:54 +00003094 case Expr::MLV_LValueCast:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003095 Diag = diag::err_typecheck_lvalue_casts_not_supported;
3096 break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003097 case Expr::MLV_InvalidExpression:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003098 Diag = diag::err_typecheck_expression_not_modifiable_lvalue;
3099 break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003100 case Expr::MLV_IncompleteType:
3101 case Expr::MLV_IncompleteVoidType:
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00003102 return S.DiagnoseIncompleteType(Loc, E->getType(),
3103 diag::err_typecheck_incomplete_type_not_modifiable_lvalue,
3104 E->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003105 case Expr::MLV_DuplicateVectorComponents:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003106 Diag = diag::err_typecheck_duplicate_vector_components_not_mlvalue;
3107 break;
Steve Naroff076d6cb2008-09-26 14:41:28 +00003108 case Expr::MLV_NotBlockQualified:
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003109 Diag = diag::err_block_decl_ref_not_modifiable_lvalue;
3110 break;
Fariborz Jahanianf18d4c82008-11-22 18:39:36 +00003111 case Expr::MLV_ReadonlyProperty:
3112 Diag = diag::error_readonly_property_assignment;
3113 break;
Fariborz Jahanianc05da422008-11-22 20:25:50 +00003114 case Expr::MLV_NoSetterProperty:
3115 Diag = diag::error_nosetter_property_assignment;
3116 break;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003117 }
Steve Naroff7cbb1462007-07-31 12:34:36 +00003118
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003119 if (NeedType)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003120 S.Diag(Loc, Diag) << E->getType() << E->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003121 else
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00003122 S.Diag(Loc, Diag) << E->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003123 return true;
3124}
3125
3126
3127
3128// C99 6.5.16.1
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003129QualType Sema::CheckAssignmentOperands(Expr *LHS, Expr *&RHS,
3130 SourceLocation Loc,
3131 QualType CompoundType) {
3132 // Verify that LHS is a modifiable lvalue, and emit error if not.
3133 if (CheckForModifiableLvalue(LHS, Loc, *this))
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003134 return QualType();
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003135
3136 QualType LHSType = LHS->getType();
3137 QualType RHSType = CompoundType.isNull() ? RHS->getType() : CompoundType;
Chris Lattner4c2642c2008-11-18 01:22:49 +00003138
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003139 AssignConvertType ConvTy;
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003140 if (CompoundType.isNull()) {
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003141 // Simple assignment "x = y".
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003142 ConvTy = CheckSingleAssignmentConstraints(LHSType, RHS);
Fariborz Jahanian82f54962009-01-13 23:34:40 +00003143 // Special case of NSObject attributes on c-style pointer types.
3144 if (ConvTy == IncompatiblePointer &&
3145 ((Context.isObjCNSObjectType(LHSType) &&
3146 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(RHSType)) ||
3147 (Context.isObjCNSObjectType(RHSType) &&
3148 Context.isObjCObjectPointerType(LHSType))))
3149 ConvTy = Compatible;
3150
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003151 // If the RHS is a unary plus or minus, check to see if they = and + are
3152 // right next to each other. If so, the user may have typo'd "x =+ 4"
3153 // instead of "x += 4".
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003154 Expr *RHSCheck = RHS;
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003155 if (ImplicitCastExpr *ICE = dyn_cast<ImplicitCastExpr>(RHSCheck))
3156 RHSCheck = ICE->getSubExpr();
3157 if (UnaryOperator *UO = dyn_cast<UnaryOperator>(RHSCheck)) {
3158 if ((UO->getOpcode() == UnaryOperator::Plus ||
3159 UO->getOpcode() == UnaryOperator::Minus) &&
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003160 Loc.isFileID() && UO->getOperatorLoc().isFileID() &&
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003161 // Only if the two operators are exactly adjacent.
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003162 Loc.getFileLocWithOffset(1) == UO->getOperatorLoc())
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00003163 Diag(Loc, diag::warn_not_compound_assign)
3164 << (UO->getOpcode() == UnaryOperator::Plus ? "+" : "-")
3165 << SourceRange(UO->getOperatorLoc(), UO->getOperatorLoc());
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003166 }
3167 } else {
3168 // Compound assignment "x += y"
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003169 ConvTy = CheckCompoundAssignmentConstraints(LHSType, RHSType);
Chris Lattner34c85082008-08-21 18:04:13 +00003170 }
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003171
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003172 if (DiagnoseAssignmentResult(ConvTy, Loc, LHSType, RHSType,
3173 RHS, "assigning"))
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00003174 return QualType();
3175
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003176 // C99 6.5.16p3: The type of an assignment expression is the type of the
3177 // left operand unless the left operand has qualified type, in which case
3178 // it is the unqualified version of the type of the left operand.
3179 // C99 6.5.16.1p2: In simple assignment, the value of the right operand
3180 // is converted to the type of the assignment expression (above).
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003181 // C++ 5.17p1: the type of the assignment expression is that of its left
3182 // oprdu.
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003183 return LHSType.getUnqualifiedType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003184}
3185
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003186// C99 6.5.17
3187QualType Sema::CheckCommaOperands(Expr *LHS, Expr *&RHS, SourceLocation Loc) {
3188 // FIXME: what is required for LHS?
Chris Lattner03c430f2008-07-25 20:54:07 +00003189
3190 // Comma performs lvalue conversion (C99 6.3.2.1), but not unary conversions.
Chris Lattner1eafdea2008-11-18 01:30:42 +00003191 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(RHS);
3192 return RHS->getType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003193}
3194
3195/// CheckIncrementDecrementOperand - unlike most "Check" methods, this routine
3196/// doesn't need to call UsualUnaryConversions or UsualArithmeticConversions.
Sebastian Redl0440c8c2008-12-20 09:35:34 +00003197QualType Sema::CheckIncrementDecrementOperand(Expr *Op, SourceLocation OpLoc,
3198 bool isInc) {
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003199 QualType ResType = Op->getType();
3200 assert(!ResType.isNull() && "no type for increment/decrement expression");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003201
Sebastian Redl0440c8c2008-12-20 09:35:34 +00003202 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && ResType->isBooleanType()) {
3203 // Decrement of bool is not allowed.
3204 if (!isInc) {
3205 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_decrement_bool) << Op->getSourceRange();
3206 return QualType();
3207 }
3208 // Increment of bool sets it to true, but is deprecated.
3209 Diag(OpLoc, diag::warn_increment_bool) << Op->getSourceRange();
3210 } else if (ResType->isRealType()) {
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003211 // OK!
3212 } else if (const PointerType *PT = ResType->getAsPointerType()) {
3213 // C99 6.5.2.4p2, 6.5.6p2
3214 if (PT->getPointeeType()->isObjectType()) {
3215 // Pointer to object is ok!
3216 } else if (PT->getPointeeType()->isVoidType()) {
Douglas Gregorb3193242009-01-23 00:36:41 +00003217 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
3218 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_void_type)
3219 << Op->getSourceRange();
3220 return QualType();
3221 }
3222
3223 // Pointer to void is a GNU extension in C.
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003224 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_gnu_void_ptr) << Op->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00003225 } else if (PT->getPointeeType()->isFunctionType()) {
Douglas Gregorb3193242009-01-23 00:36:41 +00003226 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus) {
3227 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_pointer_arith_function_type)
3228 << Op->getType() << Op->getSourceRange();
3229 return QualType();
3230 }
3231
3232 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_gnu_ptr_func_arith)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003233 << ResType << Op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003234 return QualType();
Douglas Gregor46fe06e2009-01-19 19:26:10 +00003235 } else {
3236 DiagnoseIncompleteType(OpLoc, PT->getPointeeType(),
3237 diag::err_typecheck_arithmetic_incomplete_type,
3238 Op->getSourceRange(), SourceRange(),
3239 ResType);
3240 return QualType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003241 }
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003242 } else if (ResType->isComplexType()) {
3243 // C99 does not support ++/-- on complex types, we allow as an extension.
3244 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_integer_increment_complex)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003245 << ResType << Op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003246 } else {
3247 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_illegal_increment_decrement)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003248 << ResType << Op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003249 return QualType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003250 }
Steve Naroff6acc0f42007-08-23 21:37:33 +00003251 // At this point, we know we have a real, complex or pointer type.
3252 // Now make sure the operand is a modifiable lvalue.
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003253 if (CheckForModifiableLvalue(Op, OpLoc, *this))
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003254 return QualType();
Chris Lattnere65182c2008-11-21 07:05:48 +00003255 return ResType;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003256}
3257
Anders Carlsson4b3db2b2008-02-01 07:15:58 +00003258/// getPrimaryDecl - Helper function for CheckAddressOfOperand().
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003259/// This routine allows us to typecheck complex/recursive expressions
Daniel Dunbarb45f75c2008-08-04 20:02:37 +00003260/// where the declaration is needed for type checking. We only need to
3261/// handle cases when the expression references a function designator
3262/// or is an lvalue. Here are some examples:
3263/// - &(x) => x
3264/// - &*****f => f for f a function designator.
3265/// - &s.xx => s
3266/// - &s.zz[1].yy -> s, if zz is an array
3267/// - *(x + 1) -> x, if x is an array
3268/// - &"123"[2] -> 0
3269/// - & __real__ x -> x
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00003270static NamedDecl *getPrimaryDecl(Expr *E) {
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003271 switch (E->getStmtClass()) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003272 case Stmt::DeclRefExprClass:
Douglas Gregor566782a2009-01-06 05:10:23 +00003273 case Stmt::QualifiedDeclRefExprClass:
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003274 return cast<DeclRefExpr>(E)->getDecl();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003275 case Stmt::MemberExprClass:
Chris Lattnera3249072007-11-16 17:46:48 +00003276 // Fields cannot be declared with a 'register' storage class.
3277 // &X->f is always ok, even if X is declared register.
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003278 if (cast<MemberExpr>(E)->isArrow())
Chris Lattnera3249072007-11-16 17:46:48 +00003279 return 0;
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003280 return getPrimaryDecl(cast<MemberExpr>(E)->getBase());
Anders Carlsson4b3db2b2008-02-01 07:15:58 +00003281 case Stmt::ArraySubscriptExprClass: {
Daniel Dunbarb45f75c2008-08-04 20:02:37 +00003282 // &X[4] and &4[X] refers to X if X is not a pointer.
Anders Carlsson4b3db2b2008-02-01 07:15:58 +00003283
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00003284 NamedDecl *D = getPrimaryDecl(cast<ArraySubscriptExpr>(E)->getBase());
Daniel Dunbar612720d2008-10-21 21:22:32 +00003285 ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast_or_null<ValueDecl>(D);
Anders Carlsson655694e2008-02-01 16:01:31 +00003286 if (!VD || VD->getType()->isPointerType())
Anders Carlsson4b3db2b2008-02-01 07:15:58 +00003287 return 0;
3288 else
3289 return VD;
3290 }
Daniel Dunbarb45f75c2008-08-04 20:02:37 +00003291 case Stmt::UnaryOperatorClass: {
3292 UnaryOperator *UO = cast<UnaryOperator>(E);
3293
3294 switch(UO->getOpcode()) {
3295 case UnaryOperator::Deref: {
3296 // *(X + 1) refers to X if X is not a pointer.
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00003297 if (NamedDecl *D = getPrimaryDecl(UO->getSubExpr())) {
3298 ValueDecl *VD = dyn_cast<ValueDecl>(D);
3299 if (!VD || VD->getType()->isPointerType())
3300 return 0;
3301 return VD;
3302 }
3303 return 0;
Daniel Dunbarb45f75c2008-08-04 20:02:37 +00003304 }
3305 case UnaryOperator::Real:
3306 case UnaryOperator::Imag:
3307 case UnaryOperator::Extension:
3308 return getPrimaryDecl(UO->getSubExpr());
3309 default:
3310 return 0;
3311 }
3312 }
3313 case Stmt::BinaryOperatorClass: {
3314 BinaryOperator *BO = cast<BinaryOperator>(E);
3315
3316 // Handle cases involving pointer arithmetic. The result of an
3317 // Assign or AddAssign is not an lvalue so they can be ignored.
3318
3319 // (x + n) or (n + x) => x
3320 if (BO->getOpcode() == BinaryOperator::Add) {
3321 if (BO->getLHS()->getType()->isPointerType()) {
3322 return getPrimaryDecl(BO->getLHS());
3323 } else if (BO->getRHS()->getType()->isPointerType()) {
3324 return getPrimaryDecl(BO->getRHS());
3325 }
3326 }
3327
3328 return 0;
3329 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003330 case Stmt::ParenExprClass:
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003331 return getPrimaryDecl(cast<ParenExpr>(E)->getSubExpr());
Chris Lattnera3249072007-11-16 17:46:48 +00003332 case Stmt::ImplicitCastExprClass:
3333 // &X[4] when X is an array, has an implicit cast from array to pointer.
Chris Lattner48d7f382008-04-02 04:24:33 +00003334 return getPrimaryDecl(cast<ImplicitCastExpr>(E)->getSubExpr());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003335 default:
3336 return 0;
3337 }
3338}
3339
3340/// CheckAddressOfOperand - The operand of & must be either a function
3341/// designator or an lvalue designating an object. If it is an lvalue, the
3342/// object cannot be declared with storage class register or be a bit field.
3343/// Note: The usual conversions are *not* applied to the operand of the &
3344/// operator (C99 6.3.2.1p[2-4]), and its result is never an lvalue.
Douglas Gregor45014fd2008-11-10 20:40:00 +00003345/// In C++, the operand might be an overloaded function name, in which case
3346/// we allow the '&' but retain the overloaded-function type.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003347QualType Sema::CheckAddressOfOperand(Expr *op, SourceLocation OpLoc) {
Douglas Gregore6be68a2008-12-17 22:52:20 +00003348 if (op->isTypeDependent())
3349 return Context.DependentTy;
3350
Steve Naroff9c6c3592008-01-13 17:10:08 +00003351 if (getLangOptions().C99) {
3352 // Implement C99-only parts of addressof rules.
3353 if (UnaryOperator* uOp = dyn_cast<UnaryOperator>(op)) {
3354 if (uOp->getOpcode() == UnaryOperator::Deref)
3355 // Per C99 6.5.3.2, the address of a deref always returns a valid result
3356 // (assuming the deref expression is valid).
3357 return uOp->getSubExpr()->getType();
3358 }
3359 // Technically, there should be a check for array subscript
3360 // expressions here, but the result of one is always an lvalue anyway.
3361 }
Douglas Gregord2baafd2008-10-21 16:13:35 +00003362 NamedDecl *dcl = getPrimaryDecl(op);
Chris Lattner25168a52008-07-26 21:30:36 +00003363 Expr::isLvalueResult lval = op->isLvalue(Context);
Nuno Lopes1a68ecf2008-12-16 22:59:47 +00003364
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003365 if (lval != Expr::LV_Valid) { // C99 6.5.3.2p1
Chris Lattnera3249072007-11-16 17:46:48 +00003366 if (!dcl || !isa<FunctionDecl>(dcl)) {// allow function designators
3367 // FIXME: emit more specific diag...
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00003368 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_invalid_lvalue_addrof)
3369 << op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003370 return QualType();
3371 }
Steve Naroff73cf87e2008-02-29 23:30:25 +00003372 } else if (MemberExpr *MemExpr = dyn_cast<MemberExpr>(op)) { // C99 6.5.3.2p1
Douglas Gregor82d44772008-12-20 23:49:58 +00003373 if (FieldDecl *Field = dyn_cast<FieldDecl>(MemExpr->getMemberDecl())) {
3374 if (Field->isBitField()) {
3375 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_address_of)
3376 << "bit-field" << op->getSourceRange();
3377 return QualType();
3378 }
Steve Naroff73cf87e2008-02-29 23:30:25 +00003379 }
3380 // Check for Apple extension for accessing vector components.
3381 } else if (isa<ArraySubscriptExpr>(op) &&
3382 cast<ArraySubscriptExpr>(op)->getBase()->getType()->isVectorType()) {
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00003383 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_address_of)
3384 << "vector" << op->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff73cf87e2008-02-29 23:30:25 +00003385 return QualType();
3386 } else if (dcl) { // C99 6.5.3.2p1
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003387 // We have an lvalue with a decl. Make sure the decl is not declared
3388 // with the register storage-class specifier.
3389 if (const VarDecl *vd = dyn_cast<VarDecl>(dcl)) {
3390 if (vd->getStorageClass() == VarDecl::Register) {
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00003391 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_address_of)
3392 << "register variable" << op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003393 return QualType();
3394 }
Douglas Gregor5b82d612008-12-10 21:26:49 +00003395 } else if (isa<OverloadedFunctionDecl>(dcl)) {
Douglas Gregor45014fd2008-11-10 20:40:00 +00003396 return Context.OverloadTy;
Douglas Gregor5b82d612008-12-10 21:26:49 +00003397 } else if (isa<FieldDecl>(dcl)) {
3398 // Okay: we can take the address of a field.
Nuno Lopesdf239522008-12-16 22:58:26 +00003399 } else if (isa<FunctionDecl>(dcl)) {
3400 // Okay: we can take the address of a function.
Douglas Gregor5b82d612008-12-10 21:26:49 +00003401 }
Nuno Lopesdf239522008-12-16 22:58:26 +00003402 else
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003403 assert(0 && "Unknown/unexpected decl type");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003404 }
Chris Lattnera55e3212008-07-27 00:48:22 +00003405
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003406 // If the operand has type "type", the result has type "pointer to type".
3407 return Context.getPointerType(op->getType());
3408}
3409
Chris Lattnerda5c0872008-11-23 09:13:29 +00003410QualType Sema::CheckIndirectionOperand(Expr *Op, SourceLocation OpLoc) {
3411 UsualUnaryConversions(Op);
3412 QualType Ty = Op->getType();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003413
Chris Lattnerda5c0872008-11-23 09:13:29 +00003414 // Note that per both C89 and C99, this is always legal, even if ptype is an
3415 // incomplete type or void. It would be possible to warn about dereferencing
3416 // a void pointer, but it's completely well-defined, and such a warning is
3417 // unlikely to catch any mistakes.
3418 if (const PointerType *PT = Ty->getAsPointerType())
Steve Naroff9c6c3592008-01-13 17:10:08 +00003419 return PT->getPointeeType();
Chris Lattnerda5c0872008-11-23 09:13:29 +00003420
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00003421 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_indirection_requires_pointer)
Chris Lattnerda5c0872008-11-23 09:13:29 +00003422 << Ty << Op->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003423 return QualType();
3424}
3425
3426static inline BinaryOperator::Opcode ConvertTokenKindToBinaryOpcode(
3427 tok::TokenKind Kind) {
3428 BinaryOperator::Opcode Opc;
3429 switch (Kind) {
3430 default: assert(0 && "Unknown binop!");
3431 case tok::star: Opc = BinaryOperator::Mul; break;
3432 case tok::slash: Opc = BinaryOperator::Div; break;
3433 case tok::percent: Opc = BinaryOperator::Rem; break;
3434 case tok::plus: Opc = BinaryOperator::Add; break;
3435 case tok::minus: Opc = BinaryOperator::Sub; break;
3436 case tok::lessless: Opc = BinaryOperator::Shl; break;
3437 case tok::greatergreater: Opc = BinaryOperator::Shr; break;
3438 case tok::lessequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::LE; break;
3439 case tok::less: Opc = BinaryOperator::LT; break;
3440 case tok::greaterequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::GE; break;
3441 case tok::greater: Opc = BinaryOperator::GT; break;
3442 case tok::exclaimequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::NE; break;
3443 case tok::equalequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::EQ; break;
3444 case tok::amp: Opc = BinaryOperator::And; break;
3445 case tok::caret: Opc = BinaryOperator::Xor; break;
3446 case tok::pipe: Opc = BinaryOperator::Or; break;
3447 case tok::ampamp: Opc = BinaryOperator::LAnd; break;
3448 case tok::pipepipe: Opc = BinaryOperator::LOr; break;
3449 case tok::equal: Opc = BinaryOperator::Assign; break;
3450 case tok::starequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::MulAssign; break;
3451 case tok::slashequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::DivAssign; break;
3452 case tok::percentequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::RemAssign; break;
3453 case tok::plusequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::AddAssign; break;
3454 case tok::minusequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::SubAssign; break;
3455 case tok::lesslessequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::ShlAssign; break;
3456 case tok::greatergreaterequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::ShrAssign; break;
3457 case tok::ampequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::AndAssign; break;
3458 case tok::caretequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::XorAssign; break;
3459 case tok::pipeequal: Opc = BinaryOperator::OrAssign; break;
3460 case tok::comma: Opc = BinaryOperator::Comma; break;
3461 }
3462 return Opc;
3463}
3464
3465static inline UnaryOperator::Opcode ConvertTokenKindToUnaryOpcode(
3466 tok::TokenKind Kind) {
3467 UnaryOperator::Opcode Opc;
3468 switch (Kind) {
3469 default: assert(0 && "Unknown unary op!");
3470 case tok::plusplus: Opc = UnaryOperator::PreInc; break;
3471 case tok::minusminus: Opc = UnaryOperator::PreDec; break;
3472 case tok::amp: Opc = UnaryOperator::AddrOf; break;
3473 case tok::star: Opc = UnaryOperator::Deref; break;
3474 case tok::plus: Opc = UnaryOperator::Plus; break;
3475 case tok::minus: Opc = UnaryOperator::Minus; break;
3476 case tok::tilde: Opc = UnaryOperator::Not; break;
3477 case tok::exclaim: Opc = UnaryOperator::LNot; break;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003478 case tok::kw___real: Opc = UnaryOperator::Real; break;
3479 case tok::kw___imag: Opc = UnaryOperator::Imag; break;
3480 case tok::kw___extension__: Opc = UnaryOperator::Extension; break;
3481 }
3482 return Opc;
3483}
3484
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003485/// CreateBuiltinBinOp - Creates a new built-in binary operation with
3486/// operator @p Opc at location @c TokLoc. This routine only supports
3487/// built-in operations; ActOnBinOp handles overloaded operators.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003488Action::OwningExprResult Sema::CreateBuiltinBinOp(SourceLocation OpLoc,
3489 unsigned Op,
3490 Expr *lhs, Expr *rhs) {
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003491 QualType ResultTy; // Result type of the binary operator.
3492 QualType CompTy; // Computation type for compound assignments (e.g. '+=')
3493 BinaryOperator::Opcode Opc = (BinaryOperator::Opcode)Op;
3494
3495 switch (Opc) {
3496 default:
3497 assert(0 && "Unknown binary expr!");
3498 case BinaryOperator::Assign:
3499 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, QualType());
3500 break;
3501 case BinaryOperator::Mul:
3502 case BinaryOperator::Div:
3503 ResultTy = CheckMultiplyDivideOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3504 break;
3505 case BinaryOperator::Rem:
3506 ResultTy = CheckRemainderOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3507 break;
3508 case BinaryOperator::Add:
3509 ResultTy = CheckAdditionOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3510 break;
3511 case BinaryOperator::Sub:
3512 ResultTy = CheckSubtractionOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3513 break;
3514 case BinaryOperator::Shl:
3515 case BinaryOperator::Shr:
3516 ResultTy = CheckShiftOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3517 break;
3518 case BinaryOperator::LE:
3519 case BinaryOperator::LT:
3520 case BinaryOperator::GE:
3521 case BinaryOperator::GT:
3522 ResultTy = CheckCompareOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3523 break;
3524 case BinaryOperator::EQ:
3525 case BinaryOperator::NE:
3526 ResultTy = CheckCompareOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, false);
3527 break;
3528 case BinaryOperator::And:
3529 case BinaryOperator::Xor:
3530 case BinaryOperator::Or:
3531 ResultTy = CheckBitwiseOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3532 break;
3533 case BinaryOperator::LAnd:
3534 case BinaryOperator::LOr:
3535 ResultTy = CheckLogicalOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3536 break;
3537 case BinaryOperator::MulAssign:
3538 case BinaryOperator::DivAssign:
3539 CompTy = CheckMultiplyDivideOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3540 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3541 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3542 break;
3543 case BinaryOperator::RemAssign:
3544 CompTy = CheckRemainderOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3545 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3546 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3547 break;
3548 case BinaryOperator::AddAssign:
3549 CompTy = CheckAdditionOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3550 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3551 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3552 break;
3553 case BinaryOperator::SubAssign:
3554 CompTy = CheckSubtractionOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3555 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3556 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3557 break;
3558 case BinaryOperator::ShlAssign:
3559 case BinaryOperator::ShrAssign:
3560 CompTy = CheckShiftOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3561 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3562 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3563 break;
3564 case BinaryOperator::AndAssign:
3565 case BinaryOperator::XorAssign:
3566 case BinaryOperator::OrAssign:
3567 CompTy = CheckBitwiseOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, true);
3568 if (!CompTy.isNull())
3569 ResultTy = CheckAssignmentOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc, CompTy);
3570 break;
3571 case BinaryOperator::Comma:
3572 ResultTy = CheckCommaOperands(lhs, rhs, OpLoc);
3573 break;
3574 }
3575 if (ResultTy.isNull())
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003576 return ExprError();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003577 if (CompTy.isNull())
3578 return Owned(new (Context) BinaryOperator(lhs, rhs, Opc, ResultTy, OpLoc));
3579 else
3580 return Owned(new (Context) CompoundAssignOperator(lhs, rhs, Opc, ResultTy,
Steve Naroff8b9a98d2009-01-20 21:06:31 +00003581 CompTy, OpLoc));
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003582}
3583
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003584// Binary Operators. 'Tok' is the token for the operator.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003585Action::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnBinOp(Scope *S, SourceLocation TokLoc,
3586 tok::TokenKind Kind,
3587 ExprArg LHS, ExprArg RHS) {
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003588 BinaryOperator::Opcode Opc = ConvertTokenKindToBinaryOpcode(Kind);
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003589 Expr *lhs = (Expr *)LHS.release(), *rhs = (Expr*)RHS.release();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003590
Steve Naroff87d58b42007-09-16 03:34:24 +00003591 assert((lhs != 0) && "ActOnBinOp(): missing left expression");
3592 assert((rhs != 0) && "ActOnBinOp(): missing right expression");
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003593
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00003594 // If either expression is type-dependent, just build the AST.
3595 // FIXME: We'll need to perform some caching of the result of name
3596 // lookup for operator+.
3597 if (lhs->isTypeDependent() || rhs->isTypeDependent()) {
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003598 if (Opc > BinaryOperator::Assign && Opc <= BinaryOperator::OrAssign)
3599 return Owned(new (Context) CompoundAssignOperator(lhs, rhs, Opc,
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003600 Context.DependentTy,
3601 Context.DependentTy, TokLoc));
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003602 else
3603 return Owned(new (Context) BinaryOperator(lhs, rhs, Opc, Context.DependentTy,
3604 TokLoc));
Douglas Gregor1b21c7f2008-12-05 23:32:09 +00003605 }
3606
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003607 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus &&
3608 (lhs->getType()->isRecordType() || lhs->getType()->isEnumeralType() ||
3609 rhs->getType()->isRecordType() || rhs->getType()->isEnumeralType())) {
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003610 // If this is one of the assignment operators, we only perform
3611 // overload resolution if the left-hand side is a class or
3612 // enumeration type (C++ [expr.ass]p3).
3613 if (Opc >= BinaryOperator::Assign && Opc <= BinaryOperator::OrAssign &&
3614 !(lhs->getType()->isRecordType() || lhs->getType()->isEnumeralType())) {
3615 return CreateBuiltinBinOp(TokLoc, Opc, lhs, rhs);
3616 }
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003617
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003618 // Determine which overloaded operator we're dealing with.
3619 static const OverloadedOperatorKind OverOps[] = {
3620 OO_Star, OO_Slash, OO_Percent,
3621 OO_Plus, OO_Minus,
3622 OO_LessLess, OO_GreaterGreater,
3623 OO_Less, OO_Greater, OO_LessEqual, OO_GreaterEqual,
3624 OO_EqualEqual, OO_ExclaimEqual,
3625 OO_Amp,
3626 OO_Caret,
3627 OO_Pipe,
3628 OO_AmpAmp,
3629 OO_PipePipe,
3630 OO_Equal, OO_StarEqual,
3631 OO_SlashEqual, OO_PercentEqual,
3632 OO_PlusEqual, OO_MinusEqual,
3633 OO_LessLessEqual, OO_GreaterGreaterEqual,
3634 OO_AmpEqual, OO_CaretEqual,
3635 OO_PipeEqual,
3636 OO_Comma
3637 };
3638 OverloadedOperatorKind OverOp = OverOps[Opc];
3639
Douglas Gregor5ed15042008-11-18 23:14:02 +00003640 // Add the appropriate overloaded operators (C++ [over.match.oper])
3641 // to the candidate set.
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003642 OverloadCandidateSet CandidateSet;
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003643 Expr *Args[2] = { lhs, rhs };
Douglas Gregor5ed15042008-11-18 23:14:02 +00003644 AddOperatorCandidates(OverOp, S, Args, 2, CandidateSet);
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003645
3646 // Perform overload resolution.
3647 OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best;
3648 switch (BestViableFunction(CandidateSet, Best)) {
3649 case OR_Success: {
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003650 // We found a built-in operator or an overloaded operator.
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003651 FunctionDecl *FnDecl = Best->Function;
3652
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003653 if (FnDecl) {
3654 // We matched an overloaded operator. Build a call to that
3655 // operator.
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003656
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003657 // Convert the arguments.
Douglas Gregor5ed15042008-11-18 23:14:02 +00003658 if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FnDecl)) {
3659 if (PerformObjectArgumentInitialization(lhs, Method) ||
3660 PerformCopyInitialization(rhs, FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
3661 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003662 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor5ed15042008-11-18 23:14:02 +00003663 } else {
3664 // Convert the arguments.
3665 if (PerformCopyInitialization(lhs, FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
3666 "passing") ||
3667 PerformCopyInitialization(rhs, FnDecl->getParamDecl(1)->getType(),
3668 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003669 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor5ed15042008-11-18 23:14:02 +00003670 }
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003671
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003672 // Determine the result type
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003673 QualType ResultTy
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003674 = FnDecl->getType()->getAsFunctionType()->getResultType();
3675 ResultTy = ResultTy.getNonReferenceType();
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003676
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003677 // Build the actual expression node.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003678 Expr *FnExpr = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(FnDecl, FnDecl->getType(),
3679 SourceLocation());
Douglas Gregor65fedaf2008-11-14 16:09:21 +00003680 UsualUnaryConversions(FnExpr);
3681
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003682 return Owned(new (Context) CXXOperatorCallExpr(FnExpr, Args, 2,
3683 ResultTy, TokLoc));
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003684 } else {
3685 // We matched a built-in operator. Convert the arguments, then
3686 // break out so that we will build the appropriate built-in
3687 // operator node.
Douglas Gregor6214d8a2009-01-14 15:45:31 +00003688 if (PerformImplicitConversion(lhs, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[0],
3689 Best->Conversions[0], "passing") ||
3690 PerformImplicitConversion(rhs, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[1],
3691 Best->Conversions[1], "passing"))
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003692 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003693
3694 break;
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003695 }
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003696 }
3697
3698 case OR_No_Viable_Function:
3699 // No viable function; fall through to handling this as a
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003700 // built-in operator, which will produce an error message for us.
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003701 break;
3702
3703 case OR_Ambiguous:
Chris Lattner8ba580c2008-11-19 05:08:23 +00003704 Diag(TokLoc, diag::err_ovl_ambiguous_oper)
3705 << BinaryOperator::getOpcodeStr(Opc)
3706 << lhs->getSourceRange() << rhs->getSourceRange();
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003707 PrintOverloadCandidates(CandidateSet, /*OnlyViable=*/true);
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003708 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003709 }
3710
Douglas Gregor70d26122008-11-12 17:17:38 +00003711 // Either we found no viable overloaded operator or we matched a
3712 // built-in operator. In either case, fall through to trying to
3713 // build a built-in operation.
Sebastian Redl5457c5e2009-01-19 22:31:54 +00003714 }
3715
Douglas Gregord7f915e2008-11-06 23:29:22 +00003716 // Build a built-in binary operation.
3717 return CreateBuiltinBinOp(TokLoc, Opc, lhs, rhs);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003718}
3719
3720// Unary Operators. 'Tok' is the token for the operator.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003721Action::OwningExprResult Sema::ActOnUnaryOp(Scope *S, SourceLocation OpLoc,
3722 tok::TokenKind Op, ExprArg input) {
3723 // FIXME: Input is modified later, but smart pointer not reassigned.
3724 Expr *Input = (Expr*)input.get();
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003725 UnaryOperator::Opcode Opc = ConvertTokenKindToUnaryOpcode(Op);
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003726
3727 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus &&
3728 (Input->getType()->isRecordType()
3729 || Input->getType()->isEnumeralType())) {
3730 // Determine which overloaded operator we're dealing with.
3731 static const OverloadedOperatorKind OverOps[] = {
3732 OO_None, OO_None,
3733 OO_PlusPlus, OO_MinusMinus,
3734 OO_Amp, OO_Star,
3735 OO_Plus, OO_Minus,
3736 OO_Tilde, OO_Exclaim,
3737 OO_None, OO_None,
3738 OO_None,
3739 OO_None
3740 };
3741 OverloadedOperatorKind OverOp = OverOps[Opc];
3742
3743 // Add the appropriate overloaded operators (C++ [over.match.oper])
3744 // to the candidate set.
3745 OverloadCandidateSet CandidateSet;
3746 if (OverOp != OO_None)
3747 AddOperatorCandidates(OverOp, S, &Input, 1, CandidateSet);
3748
3749 // Perform overload resolution.
3750 OverloadCandidateSet::iterator Best;
3751 switch (BestViableFunction(CandidateSet, Best)) {
3752 case OR_Success: {
3753 // We found a built-in operator or an overloaded operator.
3754 FunctionDecl *FnDecl = Best->Function;
3755
3756 if (FnDecl) {
3757 // We matched an overloaded operator. Build a call to that
3758 // operator.
3759
3760 // Convert the arguments.
3761 if (CXXMethodDecl *Method = dyn_cast<CXXMethodDecl>(FnDecl)) {
3762 if (PerformObjectArgumentInitialization(Input, Method))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003763 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003764 } else {
3765 // Convert the arguments.
3766 if (PerformCopyInitialization(Input,
3767 FnDecl->getParamDecl(0)->getType(),
3768 "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003769 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003770 }
3771
3772 // Determine the result type
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003773 QualType ResultTy
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003774 = FnDecl->getType()->getAsFunctionType()->getResultType();
3775 ResultTy = ResultTy.getNonReferenceType();
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003776
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003777 // Build the actual expression node.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003778 Expr *FnExpr = new (Context) DeclRefExpr(FnDecl, FnDecl->getType(),
3779 SourceLocation());
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003780 UsualUnaryConversions(FnExpr);
3781
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003782 input.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003783 return Owned(new (Context) CXXOperatorCallExpr(FnExpr, &Input, 1,
3784 ResultTy, OpLoc));
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003785 } else {
3786 // We matched a built-in operator. Convert the arguments, then
3787 // break out so that we will build the appropriate built-in
3788 // operator node.
Douglas Gregor6214d8a2009-01-14 15:45:31 +00003789 if (PerformImplicitConversion(Input, Best->BuiltinTypes.ParamTypes[0],
3790 Best->Conversions[0], "passing"))
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003791 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003792
3793 break;
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003794 }
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003795 }
3796
3797 case OR_No_Viable_Function:
3798 // No viable function; fall through to handling this as a
3799 // built-in operator, which will produce an error message for us.
3800 break;
3801
3802 case OR_Ambiguous:
3803 Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_ovl_ambiguous_oper)
3804 << UnaryOperator::getOpcodeStr(Opc)
3805 << Input->getSourceRange();
3806 PrintOverloadCandidates(CandidateSet, /*OnlyViable=*/true);
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003807 return ExprError();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003808 }
3809
3810 // Either we found no viable overloaded operator or we matched a
3811 // built-in operator. In either case, fall through to trying to
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003812 // build a built-in operation.
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003813 }
3814
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003815 QualType resultType;
3816 switch (Opc) {
3817 default:
3818 assert(0 && "Unimplemented unary expr!");
3819 case UnaryOperator::PreInc:
3820 case UnaryOperator::PreDec:
Sebastian Redl0440c8c2008-12-20 09:35:34 +00003821 resultType = CheckIncrementDecrementOperand(Input, OpLoc,
3822 Opc == UnaryOperator::PreInc);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003823 break;
3824 case UnaryOperator::AddrOf:
3825 resultType = CheckAddressOfOperand(Input, OpLoc);
3826 break;
3827 case UnaryOperator::Deref:
Steve Naroffccc26a72007-12-18 04:06:57 +00003828 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(Input);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003829 resultType = CheckIndirectionOperand(Input, OpLoc);
3830 break;
3831 case UnaryOperator::Plus:
3832 case UnaryOperator::Minus:
3833 UsualUnaryConversions(Input);
3834 resultType = Input->getType();
Douglas Gregor4f6904d2008-11-19 15:42:04 +00003835 if (resultType->isArithmeticType()) // C99 6.5.3.3p1
3836 break;
3837 else if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && // C++ [expr.unary.op]p6-7
3838 resultType->isEnumeralType())
3839 break;
3840 else if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus && // C++ [expr.unary.op]p6
3841 Opc == UnaryOperator::Plus &&
3842 resultType->isPointerType())
3843 break;
3844
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003845 return ExprError(Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_unary_expr)
3846 << resultType << Input->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003847 case UnaryOperator::Not: // bitwise complement
3848 UsualUnaryConversions(Input);
3849 resultType = Input->getType();
Chris Lattnerbd695022008-07-25 23:52:49 +00003850 // C99 6.5.3.3p1. We allow complex int and float as a GCC extension.
3851 if (resultType->isComplexType() || resultType->isComplexIntegerType())
3852 // C99 does not support '~' for complex conjugation.
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00003853 Diag(OpLoc, diag::ext_integer_complement_complex)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003854 << resultType << Input->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattnerbd695022008-07-25 23:52:49 +00003855 else if (!resultType->isIntegerType())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003856 return ExprError(Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_unary_expr)
3857 << resultType << Input->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003858 break;
3859 case UnaryOperator::LNot: // logical negation
3860 // Unlike +/-/~, integer promotions aren't done here (C99 6.5.3.3p5).
3861 DefaultFunctionArrayConversion(Input);
3862 resultType = Input->getType();
3863 if (!resultType->isScalarType()) // C99 6.5.3.3p1
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003864 return ExprError(Diag(OpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_unary_expr)
3865 << resultType << Input->getSourceRange());
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003866 // LNot always has type int. C99 6.5.3.3p5.
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003867 // In C++, it's bool. C++ 5.3.1p8
3868 resultType = getLangOptions().CPlusPlus ? Context.BoolTy : Context.IntTy;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003869 break;
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00003870 case UnaryOperator::Real:
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00003871 case UnaryOperator::Imag:
Chris Lattner5110ad52007-08-24 21:41:10 +00003872 resultType = CheckRealImagOperand(Input, OpLoc);
Chris Lattner03931a72007-08-24 21:16:53 +00003873 break;
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003874 case UnaryOperator::Extension:
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003875 resultType = Input->getType();
3876 break;
3877 }
3878 if (resultType.isNull())
Sebastian Redl8b769972009-01-19 00:08:26 +00003879 return ExprError();
3880 input.release();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003881 return Owned(new (Context) UnaryOperator(Input, Opc, resultType, OpLoc));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003882}
3883
Steve Naroff5cbb02f2007-09-16 14:56:35 +00003884/// ActOnAddrLabel - Parse the GNU address of label extension: "&&foo".
3885Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnAddrLabel(SourceLocation OpLoc,
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003886 SourceLocation LabLoc,
3887 IdentifierInfo *LabelII) {
3888 // Look up the record for this label identifier.
3889 LabelStmt *&LabelDecl = LabelMap[LabelII];
3890
Daniel Dunbar879788d2008-08-04 16:51:22 +00003891 // If we haven't seen this label yet, create a forward reference. It
3892 // will be validated and/or cleaned up in ActOnFinishFunctionBody.
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003893 if (LabelDecl == 0)
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003894 LabelDecl = new (Context) LabelStmt(LabLoc, LabelII, 0);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003895
3896 // Create the AST node. The address of a label always has type 'void*'.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003897 return new (Context) AddrLabelExpr(OpLoc, LabLoc, LabelDecl,
3898 Context.getPointerType(Context.VoidTy));
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003899}
3900
Steve Naroff5cbb02f2007-09-16 14:56:35 +00003901Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnStmtExpr(SourceLocation LPLoc, StmtTy *substmt,
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003902 SourceLocation RPLoc) { // "({..})"
3903 Stmt *SubStmt = static_cast<Stmt*>(substmt);
3904 assert(SubStmt && isa<CompoundStmt>(SubStmt) && "Invalid action invocation!");
3905 CompoundStmt *Compound = cast<CompoundStmt>(SubStmt);
3906
3907 // FIXME: there are a variety of strange constraints to enforce here, for
3908 // example, it is not possible to goto into a stmt expression apparently.
3909 // More semantic analysis is needed.
3910
3911 // FIXME: the last statement in the compount stmt has its value used. We
3912 // should not warn about it being unused.
3913
3914 // If there are sub stmts in the compound stmt, take the type of the last one
3915 // as the type of the stmtexpr.
3916 QualType Ty = Context.VoidTy;
3917
Chris Lattner200964f2008-07-26 19:51:01 +00003918 if (!Compound->body_empty()) {
3919 Stmt *LastStmt = Compound->body_back();
3920 // If LastStmt is a label, skip down through into the body.
3921 while (LabelStmt *Label = dyn_cast<LabelStmt>(LastStmt))
3922 LastStmt = Label->getSubStmt();
3923
3924 if (Expr *LastExpr = dyn_cast<Expr>(LastStmt))
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003925 Ty = LastExpr->getType();
Chris Lattner200964f2008-07-26 19:51:01 +00003926 }
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003927
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003928 return new (Context) StmtExpr(Compound, Ty, LPLoc, RPLoc);
Chris Lattner4b009652007-07-25 00:24:17 +00003929}
Steve Naroff63bad2d2007-08-01 22:05:33 +00003930
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00003931Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnBuiltinOffsetOf(Scope *S,
3932 SourceLocation BuiltinLoc,
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003933 SourceLocation TypeLoc,
3934 TypeTy *argty,
3935 OffsetOfComponent *CompPtr,
3936 unsigned NumComponents,
3937 SourceLocation RPLoc) {
3938 QualType ArgTy = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(argty);
3939 assert(!ArgTy.isNull() && "Missing type argument!");
3940
3941 // We must have at least one component that refers to the type, and the first
3942 // one is known to be a field designator. Verify that the ArgTy represents
3943 // a struct/union/class.
3944 if (!ArgTy->isRecordType())
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003945 return Diag(TypeLoc, diag::err_offsetof_record_type) << ArgTy;
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003946
3947 // Otherwise, create a compound literal expression as the base, and
3948 // iteratively process the offsetof designators.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003949 Expr *Res = new (Context) CompoundLiteralExpr(SourceLocation(), ArgTy, 0,
3950 false);
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003951
Chris Lattnerb37522e2007-08-31 21:49:13 +00003952 // offsetof with non-identifier designators (e.g. "offsetof(x, a.b[c])") are a
3953 // GCC extension, diagnose them.
3954 if (NumComponents != 1)
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00003955 Diag(BuiltinLoc, diag::ext_offsetof_extended_field_designator)
3956 << SourceRange(CompPtr[1].LocStart, CompPtr[NumComponents-1].LocEnd);
Chris Lattnerb37522e2007-08-31 21:49:13 +00003957
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003958 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumComponents; ++i) {
3959 const OffsetOfComponent &OC = CompPtr[i];
3960 if (OC.isBrackets) {
3961 // Offset of an array sub-field. TODO: Should we allow vector elements?
Chris Lattnera1923f62008-08-04 07:31:14 +00003962 const ArrayType *AT = Context.getAsArrayType(Res->getType());
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003963 if (!AT) {
3964 delete Res;
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003965 return Diag(OC.LocEnd, diag::err_offsetof_array_type) << Res->getType();
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003966 }
3967
Chris Lattner2af6a802007-08-30 17:59:59 +00003968 // FIXME: C++: Verify that operator[] isn't overloaded.
3969
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003970 // C99 6.5.2.1p1
3971 Expr *Idx = static_cast<Expr*>(OC.U.E);
3972 if (!Idx->getType()->isIntegerType())
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00003973 return Diag(Idx->getLocStart(), diag::err_typecheck_subscript)
3974 << Idx->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003975
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00003976 Res = new (Context) ArraySubscriptExpr(Res, Idx, AT->getElementType(),
3977 OC.LocEnd);
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003978 continue;
3979 }
3980
3981 const RecordType *RC = Res->getType()->getAsRecordType();
3982 if (!RC) {
3983 delete Res;
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00003984 return Diag(OC.LocEnd, diag::err_offsetof_record_type) << Res->getType();
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003985 }
3986
3987 // Get the decl corresponding to this.
3988 RecordDecl *RD = RC->getDecl();
Douglas Gregorddfd9d52008-12-23 00:26:44 +00003989 FieldDecl *MemberDecl
3990 = dyn_cast_or_null<FieldDecl>(LookupDecl(OC.U.IdentInfo,
3991 Decl::IDNS_Ordinary,
Douglas Gregor78d70132009-01-14 22:20:51 +00003992 S, RD, false, false).getAsDecl());
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00003993 if (!MemberDecl)
Chris Lattner65cae292008-11-19 08:23:25 +00003994 return Diag(BuiltinLoc, diag::err_typecheck_no_member)
3995 << OC.U.IdentInfo << SourceRange(OC.LocStart, OC.LocEnd);
Chris Lattner2af6a802007-08-30 17:59:59 +00003996
3997 // FIXME: C++: Verify that MemberDecl isn't a static field.
3998 // FIXME: Verify that MemberDecl isn't a bitfield.
Eli Friedman76b49832008-02-06 22:48:16 +00003999 // MemberDecl->getType() doesn't get the right qualifiers, but it doesn't
4000 // matter here.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004001 Res = new (Context) MemberExpr(Res, false, MemberDecl, OC.LocEnd,
4002 MemberDecl->getType().getNonReferenceType());
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00004003 }
4004
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004005 return new (Context) UnaryOperator(Res, UnaryOperator::OffsetOf,
4006 Context.getSizeType(), BuiltinLoc);
Chris Lattner0d9bcea2007-08-30 17:45:32 +00004007}
4008
4009
Steve Naroff5cbb02f2007-09-16 14:56:35 +00004010Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnTypesCompatibleExpr(SourceLocation BuiltinLoc,
Steve Naroff63bad2d2007-08-01 22:05:33 +00004011 TypeTy *arg1, TypeTy *arg2,
4012 SourceLocation RPLoc) {
4013 QualType argT1 = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(arg1);
4014 QualType argT2 = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(arg2);
4015
4016 assert((!argT1.isNull() && !argT2.isNull()) && "Missing type argument(s)");
4017
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004018 return new (Context) TypesCompatibleExpr(Context.IntTy, BuiltinLoc, argT1,
4019 argT2, RPLoc);
Steve Naroff63bad2d2007-08-01 22:05:33 +00004020}
4021
Steve Naroff5cbb02f2007-09-16 14:56:35 +00004022Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnChooseExpr(SourceLocation BuiltinLoc, ExprTy *cond,
Steve Naroff93c53012007-08-03 21:21:27 +00004023 ExprTy *expr1, ExprTy *expr2,
4024 SourceLocation RPLoc) {
4025 Expr *CondExpr = static_cast<Expr*>(cond);
4026 Expr *LHSExpr = static_cast<Expr*>(expr1);
4027 Expr *RHSExpr = static_cast<Expr*>(expr2);
4028
4029 assert((CondExpr && LHSExpr && RHSExpr) && "Missing type argument(s)");
4030
4031 // The conditional expression is required to be a constant expression.
4032 llvm::APSInt condEval(32);
4033 SourceLocation ExpLoc;
4034 if (!CondExpr->isIntegerConstantExpr(condEval, Context, &ExpLoc))
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004035 return Diag(ExpLoc, diag::err_typecheck_choose_expr_requires_constant)
4036 << CondExpr->getSourceRange();
Steve Naroff93c53012007-08-03 21:21:27 +00004037
4038 // If the condition is > zero, then the AST type is the same as the LSHExpr.
4039 QualType resType = condEval.getZExtValue() ? LHSExpr->getType() :
4040 RHSExpr->getType();
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004041 return new (Context) ChooseExpr(BuiltinLoc, CondExpr, LHSExpr, RHSExpr,
4042 resType, RPLoc);
Steve Naroff93c53012007-08-03 21:21:27 +00004043}
4044
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004045//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4046// Clang Extensions.
4047//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
4048
4049/// ActOnBlockStart - This callback is invoked when a block literal is started.
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004050void Sema::ActOnBlockStart(SourceLocation CaretLoc, Scope *BlockScope) {
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004051 // Analyze block parameters.
4052 BlockSemaInfo *BSI = new BlockSemaInfo();
4053
4054 // Add BSI to CurBlock.
4055 BSI->PrevBlockInfo = CurBlock;
4056 CurBlock = BSI;
4057
4058 BSI->ReturnType = 0;
4059 BSI->TheScope = BlockScope;
4060
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004061 BSI->TheDecl = BlockDecl::Create(Context, CurContext, CaretLoc);
Douglas Gregor8acb7272008-12-11 16:49:14 +00004062 PushDeclContext(BlockScope, BSI->TheDecl);
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004063}
4064
4065void Sema::ActOnBlockArguments(Declarator &ParamInfo) {
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004066 // Analyze arguments to block.
4067 assert(ParamInfo.getTypeObject(0).Kind == DeclaratorChunk::Function &&
4068 "Not a function declarator!");
4069 DeclaratorChunk::FunctionTypeInfo &FTI = ParamInfo.getTypeObject(0).Fun;
4070
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004071 CurBlock->hasPrototype = FTI.hasPrototype;
4072 CurBlock->isVariadic = true;
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004073
4074 // Check for C99 6.7.5.3p10 - foo(void) is a non-varargs function that takes
4075 // no arguments, not a function that takes a single void argument.
4076 if (FTI.hasPrototype &&
4077 FTI.NumArgs == 1 && !FTI.isVariadic && FTI.ArgInfo[0].Ident == 0 &&
4078 (!((ParmVarDecl *)FTI.ArgInfo[0].Param)->getType().getCVRQualifiers() &&
4079 ((ParmVarDecl *)FTI.ArgInfo[0].Param)->getType()->isVoidType())) {
4080 // empty arg list, don't push any params.
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004081 CurBlock->isVariadic = false;
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004082 } else if (FTI.hasPrototype) {
4083 for (unsigned i = 0, e = FTI.NumArgs; i != e; ++i)
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004084 CurBlock->Params.push_back((ParmVarDecl *)FTI.ArgInfo[i].Param);
4085 CurBlock->isVariadic = FTI.isVariadic;
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004086 }
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004087 CurBlock->TheDecl->setArgs(&CurBlock->Params[0], CurBlock->Params.size());
4088
4089 for (BlockDecl::param_iterator AI = CurBlock->TheDecl->param_begin(),
4090 E = CurBlock->TheDecl->param_end(); AI != E; ++AI)
4091 // If this has an identifier, add it to the scope stack.
4092 if ((*AI)->getIdentifier())
4093 PushOnScopeChains(*AI, CurBlock->TheScope);
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004094}
4095
4096/// ActOnBlockError - If there is an error parsing a block, this callback
4097/// is invoked to pop the information about the block from the action impl.
4098void Sema::ActOnBlockError(SourceLocation CaretLoc, Scope *CurScope) {
4099 // Ensure that CurBlock is deleted.
4100 llvm::OwningPtr<BlockSemaInfo> CC(CurBlock);
4101
4102 // Pop off CurBlock, handle nested blocks.
4103 CurBlock = CurBlock->PrevBlockInfo;
4104
4105 // FIXME: Delete the ParmVarDecl objects as well???
4106
4107}
4108
4109/// ActOnBlockStmtExpr - This is called when the body of a block statement
4110/// literal was successfully completed. ^(int x){...}
4111Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnBlockStmtExpr(SourceLocation CaretLoc, StmtTy *body,
4112 Scope *CurScope) {
4113 // Ensure that CurBlock is deleted.
4114 llvm::OwningPtr<BlockSemaInfo> BSI(CurBlock);
4115 llvm::OwningPtr<CompoundStmt> Body(static_cast<CompoundStmt*>(body));
4116
Steve Naroff52059382008-10-10 01:28:17 +00004117 PopDeclContext();
4118
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004119 // Pop off CurBlock, handle nested blocks.
4120 CurBlock = CurBlock->PrevBlockInfo;
4121
4122 QualType RetTy = Context.VoidTy;
4123 if (BSI->ReturnType)
4124 RetTy = QualType(BSI->ReturnType, 0);
4125
4126 llvm::SmallVector<QualType, 8> ArgTypes;
4127 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BSI->Params.size(); i != e; ++i)
4128 ArgTypes.push_back(BSI->Params[i]->getType());
4129
4130 QualType BlockTy;
4131 if (!BSI->hasPrototype)
4132 BlockTy = Context.getFunctionTypeNoProto(RetTy);
4133 else
4134 BlockTy = Context.getFunctionType(RetTy, &ArgTypes[0], ArgTypes.size(),
Argiris Kirtzidis65b99642008-10-26 16:43:14 +00004135 BSI->isVariadic, 0);
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004136
4137 BlockTy = Context.getBlockPointerType(BlockTy);
Steve Naroff9ac456d2008-10-08 17:01:13 +00004138
Steve Naroff95029d92008-10-08 18:44:00 +00004139 BSI->TheDecl->setBody(Body.take());
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004140 return new (Context) BlockExpr(BSI->TheDecl, BlockTy);
Steve Naroff52a81c02008-09-03 18:15:37 +00004141}
4142
Nate Begemanbd881ef2008-01-30 20:50:20 +00004143/// ExprsMatchFnType - return true if the Exprs in array Args have
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004144/// QualTypes that match the QualTypes of the arguments of the FnType.
Nate Begemanbd881ef2008-01-30 20:50:20 +00004145/// The number of arguments has already been validated to match the number of
4146/// arguments in FnType.
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00004147static bool ExprsMatchFnType(Expr **Args, const FunctionTypeProto *FnType,
4148 ASTContext &Context) {
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004149 unsigned NumParams = FnType->getNumArgs();
Nate Begeman778fd3b2008-04-18 23:35:14 +00004150 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumParams; ++i) {
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00004151 QualType ExprTy = Context.getCanonicalType(Args[i]->getType());
4152 QualType ParmTy = Context.getCanonicalType(FnType->getArgType(i));
Nate Begeman778fd3b2008-04-18 23:35:14 +00004153
4154 if (ExprTy.getUnqualifiedType() != ParmTy.getUnqualifiedType())
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004155 return false;
Nate Begeman778fd3b2008-04-18 23:35:14 +00004156 }
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004157 return true;
4158}
4159
4160Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnOverloadExpr(ExprTy **args, unsigned NumArgs,
4161 SourceLocation *CommaLocs,
4162 SourceLocation BuiltinLoc,
4163 SourceLocation RParenLoc) {
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004164 // __builtin_overload requires at least 2 arguments
4165 if (NumArgs < 2)
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004166 return Diag(RParenLoc, diag::err_typecheck_call_too_few_args)
4167 << SourceRange(BuiltinLoc, RParenLoc);
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004168
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004169 // The first argument is required to be a constant expression. It tells us
4170 // the number of arguments to pass to each of the functions to be overloaded.
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004171 Expr **Args = reinterpret_cast<Expr**>(args);
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004172 Expr *NParamsExpr = Args[0];
4173 llvm::APSInt constEval(32);
4174 SourceLocation ExpLoc;
4175 if (!NParamsExpr->isIntegerConstantExpr(constEval, Context, &ExpLoc))
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004176 return Diag(ExpLoc, diag::err_overload_expr_requires_non_zero_constant)
4177 << NParamsExpr->getSourceRange();
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004178
4179 // Verify that the number of parameters is > 0
4180 unsigned NumParams = constEval.getZExtValue();
4181 if (NumParams == 0)
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004182 return Diag(ExpLoc, diag::err_overload_expr_requires_non_zero_constant)
4183 << NParamsExpr->getSourceRange();
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004184 // Verify that we have at least 1 + NumParams arguments to the builtin.
4185 if ((NumParams + 1) > NumArgs)
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004186 return Diag(RParenLoc, diag::err_typecheck_call_too_few_args)
4187 << SourceRange(BuiltinLoc, RParenLoc);
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004188
4189 // Figure out the return type, by matching the args to one of the functions
Nate Begemanbd881ef2008-01-30 20:50:20 +00004190 // listed after the parameters.
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004191 OverloadExpr *OE = 0;
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004192 for (unsigned i = NumParams + 1; i < NumArgs; ++i) {
4193 // UsualUnaryConversions will convert the function DeclRefExpr into a
4194 // pointer to function.
4195 Expr *Fn = UsualUnaryConversions(Args[i]);
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00004196 const FunctionTypeProto *FnType = 0;
4197 if (const PointerType *PT = Fn->getType()->getAsPointerType())
4198 FnType = PT->getPointeeType()->getAsFunctionTypeProto();
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004199
4200 // The Expr type must be FunctionTypeProto, since FunctionTypeProto has no
4201 // parameters, and the number of parameters must match the value passed to
4202 // the builtin.
4203 if (!FnType || (FnType->getNumArgs() != NumParams))
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004204 return Diag(Fn->getExprLoc(), diag::err_overload_incorrect_fntype)
4205 << Fn->getSourceRange();
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004206
4207 // Scan the parameter list for the FunctionType, checking the QualType of
Nate Begemanbd881ef2008-01-30 20:50:20 +00004208 // each parameter against the QualTypes of the arguments to the builtin.
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004209 // If they match, return a new OverloadExpr.
Chris Lattnerd5a56aa2008-07-26 22:17:49 +00004210 if (ExprsMatchFnType(Args+1, FnType, Context)) {
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004211 if (OE)
Chris Lattner9d2cf082008-11-19 05:27:50 +00004212 return Diag(Fn->getExprLoc(), diag::err_overload_multiple_match)
4213 << OE->getFn()->getSourceRange();
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004214 // Remember our match, and continue processing the remaining arguments
4215 // to catch any errors.
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004216 OE = new (Context) OverloadExpr(Args, NumArgs, i,
Douglas Gregor0d5d89d2008-10-28 00:22:11 +00004217 FnType->getResultType().getNonReferenceType(),
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004218 BuiltinLoc, RParenLoc);
4219 }
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004220 }
Nate Begemanc6078c92008-01-31 05:38:29 +00004221 // Return the newly created OverloadExpr node, if we succeded in matching
4222 // exactly one of the candidate functions.
4223 if (OE)
4224 return OE;
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004225
4226 // If we didn't find a matching function Expr in the __builtin_overload list
4227 // the return an error.
4228 std::string typeNames;
Nate Begemanbd881ef2008-01-30 20:50:20 +00004229 for (unsigned i = 0; i != NumParams; ++i) {
4230 if (i != 0) typeNames += ", ";
4231 typeNames += Args[i+1]->getType().getAsString();
4232 }
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004233
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00004234 return Diag(BuiltinLoc, diag::err_overload_no_match)
4235 << typeNames << SourceRange(BuiltinLoc, RParenLoc);
Nate Begeman9f3bfb72008-01-17 17:46:27 +00004236}
4237
Anders Carlsson36760332007-10-15 20:28:48 +00004238Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnVAArg(SourceLocation BuiltinLoc,
4239 ExprTy *expr, TypeTy *type,
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004240 SourceLocation RPLoc) {
Anders Carlsson36760332007-10-15 20:28:48 +00004241 Expr *E = static_cast<Expr*>(expr);
4242 QualType T = QualType::getFromOpaquePtr(type);
4243
4244 InitBuiltinVaListType();
Eli Friedmandd2b9af2008-08-09 23:32:40 +00004245
4246 // Get the va_list type
4247 QualType VaListType = Context.getBuiltinVaListType();
4248 // Deal with implicit array decay; for example, on x86-64,
4249 // va_list is an array, but it's supposed to decay to
4250 // a pointer for va_arg.
4251 if (VaListType->isArrayType())
4252 VaListType = Context.getArrayDecayedType(VaListType);
Eli Friedman8754e5b2008-08-20 22:17:17 +00004253 // Make sure the input expression also decays appropriately.
4254 UsualUnaryConversions(E);
Eli Friedmandd2b9af2008-08-09 23:32:40 +00004255
4256 if (CheckAssignmentConstraints(VaListType, E->getType()) != Compatible)
Anders Carlsson36760332007-10-15 20:28:48 +00004257 return Diag(E->getLocStart(),
Chris Lattner77d52da2008-11-20 06:06:08 +00004258 diag::err_first_argument_to_va_arg_not_of_type_va_list)
Chris Lattner4bfd2232008-11-24 06:25:27 +00004259 << E->getType() << E->getSourceRange();
Anders Carlsson36760332007-10-15 20:28:48 +00004260
4261 // FIXME: Warn if a non-POD type is passed in.
4262
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004263 return new (Context) VAArgExpr(BuiltinLoc, E, T.getNonReferenceType(), RPLoc);
Anders Carlsson36760332007-10-15 20:28:48 +00004264}
4265
Douglas Gregorad4b3792008-11-29 04:51:27 +00004266Sema::ExprResult Sema::ActOnGNUNullExpr(SourceLocation TokenLoc) {
4267 // The type of __null will be int or long, depending on the size of
4268 // pointers on the target.
4269 QualType Ty;
4270 if (Context.Target.getPointerWidth(0) == Context.Target.getIntWidth())
4271 Ty = Context.IntTy;
4272 else
4273 Ty = Context.LongTy;
4274
Steve Naroff774e4152009-01-21 00:14:39 +00004275 return new (Context) GNUNullExpr(Ty, TokenLoc);
Douglas Gregorad4b3792008-11-29 04:51:27 +00004276}
4277
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004278bool Sema::DiagnoseAssignmentResult(AssignConvertType ConvTy,
4279 SourceLocation Loc,
4280 QualType DstType, QualType SrcType,
4281 Expr *SrcExpr, const char *Flavor) {
4282 // Decode the result (notice that AST's are still created for extensions).
4283 bool isInvalid = false;
4284 unsigned DiagKind;
4285 switch (ConvTy) {
4286 default: assert(0 && "Unknown conversion type");
4287 case Compatible: return false;
Chris Lattnerd951b7b2008-01-04 18:22:42 +00004288 case PointerToInt:
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004289 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_pointer_int;
4290 break;
Chris Lattnerd951b7b2008-01-04 18:22:42 +00004291 case IntToPointer:
4292 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_int_pointer;
4293 break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004294 case IncompatiblePointer:
4295 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_incompatible_pointer;
4296 break;
4297 case FunctionVoidPointer:
4298 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_pointer_void_func;
4299 break;
4300 case CompatiblePointerDiscardsQualifiers:
Douglas Gregor1815b3b2008-09-12 00:47:35 +00004301 // If the qualifiers lost were because we were applying the
4302 // (deprecated) C++ conversion from a string literal to a char*
4303 // (or wchar_t*), then there was no error (C++ 4.2p2). FIXME:
4304 // Ideally, this check would be performed in
4305 // CheckPointerTypesForAssignment. However, that would require a
4306 // bit of refactoring (so that the second argument is an
4307 // expression, rather than a type), which should be done as part
4308 // of a larger effort to fix CheckPointerTypesForAssignment for
4309 // C++ semantics.
4310 if (getLangOptions().CPlusPlus &&
4311 IsStringLiteralToNonConstPointerConversion(SrcExpr, DstType))
4312 return false;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004313 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_discards_qualifiers;
4314 break;
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00004315 case IntToBlockPointer:
4316 DiagKind = diag::err_int_to_block_pointer;
4317 break;
4318 case IncompatibleBlockPointer:
Steve Naroff82324d62008-09-24 23:31:10 +00004319 DiagKind = diag::ext_typecheck_convert_incompatible_block_pointer;
Steve Naroff3454b6c2008-09-04 15:10:53 +00004320 break;
Steve Naroff19608432008-10-14 22:18:38 +00004321 case IncompatibleObjCQualifiedId:
4322 // FIXME: Diagnose the problem in ObjCQualifiedIdTypesAreCompatible, since
4323 // it can give a more specific diagnostic.
4324 DiagKind = diag::warn_incompatible_qualified_id;
4325 break;
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004326 case Incompatible:
4327 DiagKind = diag::err_typecheck_convert_incompatible;
4328 isInvalid = true;
4329 break;
4330 }
4331
Chris Lattner271d4c22008-11-24 05:29:24 +00004332 Diag(Loc, DiagKind) << DstType << SrcType << Flavor
4333 << SrcExpr->getSourceRange();
Chris Lattner005ed752008-01-04 18:04:52 +00004334 return isInvalid;
4335}
Anders Carlssond5201b92008-11-30 19:50:32 +00004336
4337bool Sema::VerifyIntegerConstantExpression(const Expr* E, llvm::APSInt *Result)
4338{
4339 Expr::EvalResult EvalResult;
4340
4341 if (!E->Evaluate(EvalResult, Context) || !EvalResult.Val.isInt() ||
4342 EvalResult.HasSideEffects) {
4343 Diag(E->getExprLoc(), diag::err_expr_not_ice) << E->getSourceRange();
4344
4345 if (EvalResult.Diag) {
4346 // We only show the note if it's not the usual "invalid subexpression"
4347 // or if it's actually in a subexpression.
4348 if (EvalResult.Diag != diag::note_invalid_subexpr_in_ice ||
4349 E->IgnoreParens() != EvalResult.DiagExpr->IgnoreParens())
4350 Diag(EvalResult.DiagLoc, EvalResult.Diag);
4351 }
4352
4353 return true;
4354 }
4355
4356 if (EvalResult.Diag) {
4357 Diag(E->getExprLoc(), diag::ext_expr_not_ice) <<
4358 E->getSourceRange();
4359
4360 // Print the reason it's not a constant.
4361 if (Diags.getDiagnosticLevel(diag::ext_expr_not_ice) != Diagnostic::Ignored)
4362 Diag(EvalResult.DiagLoc, EvalResult.Diag);
4363 }
4364
4365 if (Result)
4366 *Result = EvalResult.Val.getInt();
4367 return false;
4368}